Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Students can Download Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Plus Two Accountancy Graphs and Charts for Business Data One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
_____________ are the visual representation of numerical data
Answer:
Chart/ Graph

Question 2.
Chart / Graph has at least ____________ dimenstional relationship
(a) Two
(b) Three
(c) Four
(d) Five
Answer:
(a) Two

Question 3.
____________ chart is suitable for comparing multiple.
Answer:
Bar Chart

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 4.
In column chart, the X-axis shows
(a) Value of each category
(b) Different categories
(c) Height of the chart
(d) Depth of the value
Answer:
(b) Different categories

Question 5.
________ Chart is similar to the column chart, with the difference being that the data series are displayed horizontally
(a) Line chart
(b) Pie chart
(c) Barchart
(d) Area chart
Answer:
(c) Bar chart

Question 6.
________ chart shows data changes for a certain period of time.
Answer:
Line chart

Question 7.
_______ chart contains only one data series
Answer:
Pie chart

Question 8.
_______chart shows values as circular sectors to the total circle
Answer:
Pie chart

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 9.
Pie chart don’t have more than __________ categories.
(a) Ten
(b) Twenty Five
(c) Seven
(d) Three
Answer:
(c) Seven

Question 10.
____________ is a pictorial representation of data, which has at least two dimensional relationships.
(a) Graph
(b) Chart
(c) Diagram
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 11.
_________ Chart is used to compare values across categories.
(a) Column chart
(b) Line chart
(c) Pie chart
(d) Barchart
Answer:
(a) Column chart

Question 12.
_________ chart is used to display trends over time.
Answer:
Line chart

Question 13.
The entire chart including all elements is termed as ________
Answer:
Chart area

Question 14.
In 3D chart, the area is bounded by three axes ie _____, _____ & _____
Answer:
X, Y, Z

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 15.
In ______ chart, both axes display values ie they have no category axis.
Answer:
XY Chart or Scatter diagram

Question 16.
_______ specifices the colour, symbol or pattern used to mark data series.
Answer:
Legends

Question 17.
The change the location of a chart, right click the chart and select.
(a) Chart Type
(b) Source Data
(c) Move here
(d) Chart Options
Answer:
(c) Move here

Question 18.
In 3D chart X, Y & Z axes are used to show
(a) Category, Value, Total
(b) Depth, Vertical, Horizontal
(c) Length, Breadth, Depth
(d) Category, Value, Series.
Answer:
(d) Category, Value, Series

Question 19.
Legand can be repositioned on the chart
(a) Anywhere
(b) On right side only
(c) On the corner only
(d) On the left side only
Answer:
(a) Anywhere

Question 20.
Which chart element details the data values and categories below the chart?
(a) Data table
(b) Data marker
(c) Data labels
(d) Datapoint
Answer:
(c) Data labels

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 21.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data one marks q21 img 1
Which type of chart is this?
Answer:
Radar chart

Question 22.
The intersection of both the axis (X-axis and Y-axis) is called __________ of the graph.
Answer:
Origin (0)

Question 23.
_________ Chart display in rings, where each ring represents a data series
Answer:
Doughnut chart.

Question 24.
Name the given chart
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data one marks q24 img 2
Answer:
Bar Chart

Question 25.
In _________ chart, the area below the plotted lines is solid
Answer:
Area chart.

Question 26.
Radar chart / Net chart is also known as ______
(a) Doughnut chart
(b) Pie chart
(c) Ara chart
(d) Star chart
Answer:
(d) Star chart

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 27.
Which among the following is the special feature of 3D chart
(a) Chart area
(b) X & Y axes
(c) Chart wall
(d) Legend
Answer:
(c) Chart wall

Question 28.
Give a suitable name to the diagram
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data one marks q28 img 3
(a) Barchart
(b) Single line graph
(c) Pie chart
(d) Area Chart
Answer:
(c) Pie Chart

Plus Two Accountancy Graphs and Charts for Business Data Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the different chart formats in Libre Office Calc
Answer:
Barchart, Column Chart, Pie chart, Line chart, Area chart, Doughnut chart, etc.

Question 2.
What is the importance of charts and graphs in business?
Answer:

  1. Chart and graphs covey lots of business information in a visual format
  2. Different business Data variables plotted in charts and graphs show the trend of the business in an easy way

Question 3.
Identify the type of chart
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data two marks q3 img 4
Answer:
Line chart

Question 4.
Give a short note on it.

  1. Barchart
  2. Pie chart

Answer:
1. Bar Chart
This type of chart shows a bar graph or column chart with horizontal bars. The Y-axis shows categories and the X-axis shows the value for each category. It is suitable for comparing multiple values.

2. Pie chart
A pie chart displays the contribution of each value to a total. It represents multiple subgroup of a single variable. It contains only one data series. A pie chart shows values as circular sectors of the total circle. Pie chart may be

  • Normal Pie chart
  • Exploded Pie chart
  • Doughnut chart or Donut chart
  • Exploded Doughnut chart

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 5.
What are the special features of graphs and charts?
Answer:

  1. Graphs/charts are the pictorial representation of business data
  2. A chart represents tabular numeric data
  3. Dimensions in the data are often displayed on axes (X, Y, & Z)

Question 6.
Differentiate between Chart area and Chart wall?
Answer:
1. Chart area:
This is the total space that is enclosed by a chart. It is the background of the chart.

2. Chart wall:
In 2D chart, the wall or area is bounded by the X and Y-axis. In the 3D chart, the wall is bounded by three axes X, Y and Z

Question 7.
Quarterly sales of a business firm is used to create a bar graph. Identify the Data variables plotted on X and Y-axis
Answer:
X-axis – Ist Quarter, IInd Quarter, IIIrd Quarter, IVth Quarter,
Y-axis – Sales in Ist Quarter, Sales in Ind Quarter, Sales in IIIrd Quarter, Sales in IVth Quarter

Question 8.
Identify the type of chart
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data two marks q8 img 5
Answer:
(a) 2D Chart
(b) 3D Chart

Question 9.
What is the use of Auto shapes in LibreOffice Calc?
Answer:
Auto shapes tool bar allows drawing a number of geometrical shapes, arrows; flow chart elements, etc.

Question 10.
What is PIE chart? What are the specialties of PIE chart.
Answer:
Pie chart:
A pie chart displays the contribution of each value to a total. It represents multiple subgroup of a single variable. It contains only one data series. A pie chart shows values as circular sectors of the total circle. Pie chart may be

  1. Normal Pie chart
  2. Exploded Pie chart
  3. Doughnut chart or Donut chart
  4. Exploded Doughnut chart

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 11.
Choose the right statements from the following.

  1. We can put on the right side of the origin positive values and on left side of the origin negative values of data on X-axis
  2. The upward side of origin shows postiive values and downward side of the origin shows negative values of data on Y-axis.
  3. We can put on the right side of the origin negative values and on left side of the origin positive values of data on X-axis.
  4. The upward side of origin shows negative values and downward side of the origin shows positive values of data on Y-axis.

Answer:
Right statements a & b

Question 12.
Identify the type of given chart. List down its features.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data two marks q12 img 6
Answer:

  1. It is a Doughnut chart
  2. Features of the doughnut chart
    • It displays data in rings
    • Each ring represents a data series
    • The first data series is displayed in the center of the chart

Question 13.
What is a 3-D chart?
Answer:
Charts can be prepared with three dimensional (3-D) effects. 3- D charts have a third axis. The third axis is called as Z-axis. So a 3-D chart has the fol¬lowing dimensions.

  1. Horizontal axis – Indicate the category – known as X-axis
  2. Vertical axis – Indicate the derived values – known as Y-axis
  3. Depth axis – Indicate the series – known as Z-axis

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 14
Differentiate between Data Marker and Data series.
Answer:
1. Data Marker:
Individual values plotted in a chart are called data marker or data point.

2. Data Series:
Data markers of the same colour or pattern is called data series.

Question 15.
Is there any difference between

  1. A column chart and
  2. A bar chart?

Substantiate your answer
Answer:
1. Column Chart:
It is the most commonly used chart type. It shows a bar chart or bar graph with vertical bars. The X-axis shows the categories and Y-axis shows the value for each category. Column chart are used to compare values across categories.

2. Bar Chart:
This type of chart shows a bar graph or column chart with horizontal bars. The Y-axis shows categories and the X-axis shows the value for each category. It is suitable for comparing multiple values.

Plus Two Accountancy Graphs and Charts for Business Data Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following

AB
(a) Area chart(1). XY chart.
(b) Barchart(2). Display contribution to a total.
(c) Pie chart(3). Suited for comparing multiple values.
(d) Scatter chart(4). Display differences between several sets of data over a period of time.

Answer:

AB
(a) Area chart(1). Display differences between several sets of data over a period of time.
(b) Barchart(2). Suited for comparing multiple values.
(c) Pie chart(3). Display contribution to a total.
(d) Scatter chart(4). XY chart.

Question 2.
What are the advantages of using Graph/ Chart?
Answer:
Advantages in using Graph/Chart:

  1. It summarises a large data set in visual form
  2. Charts or graphs can clarify trends better than do tables.
  3. It helps to estimate key values at a glance
  4. It shows each data category in a frequency distribution.
  5. It permits a visual check of the accuracy and reasonableness of calculations
  6. The charts and graphs allow the investigator to draw a valid conclusion.

Question 3.
What are the elements of a Chart/ Graph
Answer:

Chart elementsDescription
1. Axes TitlesMention the names or titles for X, Y and Z axes.
2. X, Y, & Z axesIn 2D chart, the horizontal X-axis contains categories and the vertical Y-axis contains dependent values. In 3D chart, the Z-axis will also be there represents the depth which
3. Chart AreaThis is the total space that is enclosed by a chart. It is the background of the chart.
4. Chart wallIn 2D chart, the wall or area is bounded by the X and Y-axis. In the 3D chart, the wall is bounded by three axes X, Y, and Z.
5. Chart floorThe chart floor is the lower area in the 3D chart.
6. Main Title/ sub TitleIt is the explanatory heading of the chart. It identifies the purpose of a chart.
7. Data MarkerIndividual values plotted in a chart are called data marker or data point.
8. Data SeriesData markers of the same colour or pattern is called data series.
9. LegendIt is an identifier of a piece of information shown in the chart/ graph. The legends are assigned to the data series in a chart.
10. Data LabelThe value of the data series plotted in a chart is known as data label.
11. Grid LinesThese are the vertical and horizontal lines that appear in a chart. It increases the readability of a chart.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 4.
How to use word Art styles to format text.
Answer:

  • Step 1: Click in the chart element that contains text to be changed.
  • Step 2: Click on the format.
  • Step 3: Click on word Art styles.
  • Step 4: Choose suitable options related to text formating like text fill, text outlines, shadow, etc.

Plus Two Accountancy Graphs and Charts for Business Data Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are the difference between 2D charts and 3D charts
Answer:

2D Chart3D Chart
(a) The chart represents business data with just two dimensions(a) The chart represents business data with three dimensions
(b) The two dimensions are length and height (No width)(b) The Three dimensions are Length and Height and width (or depth)
(c) There are X-axis and Y-axis(c) There is X-axis, Y-axis is and Z-axis
(d) The shape of the chart may be in the form of Rectangle, Square, Triangle, Polygon, etc(d) The shape of the chart may be Cylinder, Cube, Pyramid, etc

Question 2.
List out the steps to Rotate a chart.
Answer:

  • Step 1. Select the plot area of the chart.
  • Step 2. Click on the format tab.
  • Step 3. Click on format selection.
  • Step 4. Click on 3D Rotation and type a value of angle between 0° to 360° and then click close
  • Step 5. Click on the chart area of the chart and click on format tab.
  • Step 6. Click on shape effects and then click on Bevel and select a bevel option.

Question 3.
What are the different types of charts?
Answer:

  1. Column chart: column chart are used to compare values across categories
  2. Line chart: Line charts are used to display trends over time
  3. Pie chart: Pie charts display the contribution of each value to a total
  4. Bar chart: Bar charts are best suited for comparing multiple values
  5. Area chart: Area chart emphasis differences between several sets of data over a period of time.
  6. Scatter chart: (XY chart) This chart compares pairs of values.
  7. Radar chart: Display values relative to a centre point.
  8. Doughnut chart: It shows the relationship of parts to a whole. This chart display data in rings, where each ring represents a data series.

1. Column Chart:
It is the most commonly used chart type. It shows a bar chart or bar graph with vertical bars. The X-axis shows the categories and Y-axis shows the value for each category. Column chart are used to compare values across categories.

2. Line Chart:
A line chart shows values in the Y-axis and categories in X-axis. The Y values of each data series is connected by a line. Line chart shows data changes for a certain period of time.

3. Pie chart:
A pie chart displays the contribution of each value to a total. It represents multiple subgroup of a single variable. It contains only one data series. A pie chart shows values as circular sectors of the total circle. Pie chart may be

  • Normal Pie chart
  • Exploded Pie chart
  • Doughnut chart or Donut chart
  • Exploded Doughnut chart

4. Bar Chart:
This type of chart shows a bar graph or column chart with horizontal bars. The Y-axis shows categories and the X-axis shows the value for each category. It is suitable for comparing multiple values.

5. Area chart:
The chart shows values as points on the Y-axis. The X-axis shows categories. The Y values of each data series are connected by a line. The area between each two lines is filled with a colour.

6. Scatter chart:
Scatter chart is also known as XY chart. In this type of chart, both axes display values. This chart is used to show the relationship among two variables.

7. Radar chart:
It is also known as Net chart or Star chart. A radar chart has a separate axis for each category and the axes extend outward from the center of the chart. The value of each data point is plotted on the corresponding axis.

8. Doughnut chart:
Chart display in rings, where each ring represents a data series. The first data series is displayed in the centre of the chart.

Question 4.
Identify and explain the type of chart given below.
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data four marks q4 img 7

  1. This is scatter chart or XY chart.
  2. Features:
    • Both axes display values (No category)
    • This chart is used to show the relationship among two variables
    • Generally this chart is used for scientific, statistical and engineering data

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 5.
Match the following.

AB
(a) Legends(i) Background of the chart
(b) Pie chart(ii) Specifices the colour, symbol or pattern used to mark data series
(c) Grid Lines(iii) Displays the contribution of each value to a total
(d) Chart Area(iv) Display lines at the major intervals on the category X-axis and/or Y-axis

Answer:

  • (a) – (ii);
  • (b) – (iii);
  • (c) – (iv);
  • (d) – (i)

Question 6.
How can we change the format of a selected chart element?
Answer:

  • Step 1. Click anywhere in the chart.
  • Step 2. Click format
  • Step 3. Click format selection
  • Step 4. Select a category (Fill border, style, etc)
  • Step 5. Select formatting options

Question 7.
List down any four advantages of charts/ Graphs
Answer:
Advantages in using Graph/Chart:

  1. It summarises a large data set in visual form
  2. Charts or graphs can clarify trends better than do tables.
  3. It helps to estimate key values at a glance
  4. It shows each data category in a frequency distribution.
  5. It permits a visual check of the accuracy and reasonableness of calculations
  6. The charts and graphs allow the investigator to draw a valid conclusion.

Question 8.
What are the features of Charts/ Graphs in Libre Office Calc?
Answer:

  1. Chart is a graphical representation of data
  2. They are visual representation of numerical data
  3. Charts can be read more quickly than the raw data
  4. A chart has at least two axes – X and Y

Plus Two Accountancy Graphs and Charts for Business Data Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What Pie Chart? What are the different types of Pie Chart?
Answer:
Pie chart:
A pie chart displays the contribution of each value to a total. It represents multiple subgroups of a single variable. It contains only one data series. A pie chart shows values as circular sectors of the total circle. Pie chart may be

  1. Normal Pie chart
  2. Exploded Pie chart
  3. Doughnut chart or Donut chart
  4. Exploded Doughnut chart

Question 2.
Name the different elements of given chart.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data five marks q2 img 8
Answer:

  • X-Axis Title
  • Y-Axis Title
  • Data label
  • Main Title
  • Legend
  • X-Axis
  • Y-Axis
  • Data series

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 3.
Write the steps of changing the chart type.
Answer:

  1. First select the chart by double-clicking on it. The chart should now be surrounded by a gray bonder
  2. Right-click on the chart and choose chart type.
  3. Select the replacement chart type.
  4. Click on [OK]

Question 4.
Write the steps for preparing a chart in Libre Office Calc.
Answer:

  • Step 1: Enter the data in a worksheet with proper column and row titles
  • Step 2: Select the range of data using the mouse
  • Step 3: Click on Insert Tab → Object → Chart. Select a chart type from the “Choose a chart type” list in chart wizard window.
  • Step 4: Naming chart, X-axis and Y-axis. Click on the chart → Right click → Insert titles (Names) → OK
  • Step 5: Change the layout or styles of chart.
  • Step 6: Show or hide a legend
  • Step 7: Display or hide chart axes or gridlines
  • Step 8: Move (resize) a chart
  • Step 9: Save a chart

Plus Two Accountancy Graphs and Charts for Business Data Practical Lab Work Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Draw an Area Chart from the following
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 1
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blanks worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the above data as follows.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 2

Step 3 – Select the range A1: D6 which is to be shown in the chart.

Step 4 – Click on Insert menu → Click on Chart → Chart wizard → Select Area Chart → Finish
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 3

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 2.
Quarterly sales of a product are given below. Draw a bar diagram/bar chart

Ist Quarter25600
IInd Quarter33400
IIIrd Quarter28700
IVth Quarter40400

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blanks worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the above data as follows.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 4
Step 3 – Select the range A1: B5 which is to be shown in the chart:

Step 4 – Click on Insert menu → Click on Chart → Chart wizard Click on Bar chart → Finish
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 5

Question 3.
Draw a 3D column chart from the following details.

YearResult %
201098
201194
2012100
201385
201490

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following data in the respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 6
Step 3-Select the range A1: B6, which is to be shown in the chart.

Step 4 – Click on Insert menu → Click on Chart → Chart wizard → Click on Column Chart → Tick 3D Look → Select Bar Charts → Finish.
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 7

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 4.
The net profits of a firm for the last six years are given below. Draw a line chart.

YearNet Profit
2009125800
2010238400
2011186500
2012154900
2013251000
2014300000

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following data in the respective cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 8
Step 3 – Select the range A1: B7, which is to be shown in the chart

Step4- Click on Insert menu → Click on Chart → Chart Wizard → Click on Line Chart → Finish
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 9

Question 5.
Enter the following data into a LibreOffice Calc worksheet and draw a 3D Pie chart.

Item of ExpensesAmount
Stationery4890
Tuition Fee850
Medical Treatment3260
Insurance premium1580
Petrol3500
Vegetables700
Bank savings8400
Charity1200

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the data in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 10
Step 3 – Select the range A2: B9, which is to be shown in the chart

Step 4 – Click on Insert menu → Click on Chart → Chart wizard → Click on Pie Chart Tick on 3D Look → Finish
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 11

Question 6.
Sales for the first six months in 2 years are given below. Draw a scatter chart in a LibreOffice Calc works sheet
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 12
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the data in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 13
Step 3 – Select the range A1: C7, which is to be shown in the chart

Step 4 – Click on → Insert menu Click on → Chart → Chart Wizard → Scatter Chart→ Finish
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 14

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data

Question 7.
The production of different items in Oct. 2015 is listed below. Draw a Radar Chart
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 15
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the data in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 16

Step 3 – Select the range A1: C6, which is to be shown in the chart

Step 4 – Click on → Insert menu → Click on Chart → Chart Wizard → Click on Radar Chart → Finish
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 17

Question 8.
The following table shows the number of students passed in the higher secondary examination. Draw a doughnut chart.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 18
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2- Enter the data in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 19
Step 3 – Select the range A1: D6, which is to be shown in the chart.

Step 4 – Click on → Insert menu → Click on Chart → Chart Wizard → Click on doughnut Chart → Finish.
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Graphs and Charts for Business Data - 20

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Students can Download Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives Questions and Answers, Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Find the equation of tangents and normals to the given curves x = cost, y = sin t at t = \(\frac{π}{4}\).
Answer:
Given; x = cost, y = sin t
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 1
Equation of tangent at t = \(\frac{π}{4}\) is;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 2
Equation of normal at t = \(\frac{π}{4}\) is;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 3
⇒ \(\sqrt{2}\)y + \(\sqrt{2}\)x = 0 ⇒ y + x = 0.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 2.
A ladder Sm long is leaning against a wall. The bottom of the ladder is pulled along the ground, away from the wall, at the rate of 2cm/s. How fast is its height on the decreasing when the foot of the ladder is 4m away from the wall?
Answer:
From the figure we have;
x2 + y2 = 25 ____(1)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 4
Differentiating w.r.t t;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 5
From (1) when x = 4 ⇒ 16 + y2 = 25 ⇒ y = 3
Given; \(\frac{d x}{d t}\) = 2cm/s = 0.02 m/s
(2) ⇒ 4(0.02) + 3 \(\frac{d x}{d t}\) = 0
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 6

Question 3.
Find the points on the curve y = x3, the tangents at which are inclined at an angle of 60° to x-axis?
Answer:
\(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 3x2
Slope of the tangent = tan60°
i.e. 3x2 = \(\sqrt{3}\)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 7

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 4.
Find the equation of the tangent to the parabola y2 = 4x + 5 which is parallel to y = 2x + 7.
Answer:
y2 = 4x + 5 _____(1)
2y \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 4
\(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = \(\frac{4}{2y}\) = \(\frac{2}{y}\)
Given tangent is parallel to y = 2x + 7
ie. Slope of the tangent is 2 ⇒ \(\frac{2}{y}\) = 2 ⇒ y = 1
∴ from (1) ⇒ 1 = 4x+ 5 ⇒ 4x = -4 ⇒ x = -1
So the point of contact is (-1, 1).
∴ Equation of tangent is
y -1 = 2(x + 1) ⇒ y = 2x + 3.

Question 5.
Find the intervals in which the function f given f(x) = 2x2 – 3x is

  1. Strictly increasing.
  2. Strictly decreasing.

Answer:
Given; f(x) = 2x2 – 3x ⇒ f'(x) = 4x – 3
For turning points; f'(x) = 0
⇒ 4x – 3 = 0 ⇒ x = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
The intervals are \(\left(-\infty, \frac{3}{4}\right),\left(\frac{3}{4}, \infty\right)\)
f'(0) = – 3 < 0
∴ Strictly decreasing in \(\left(-\infty, \frac{3}{4}\right)\)
f'(1) = 1 > 0
∴ Strictly increasing in \(\left(\frac{3}{4}, \infty\right)\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 6.
Find the intervals in which the function f(x) = (x + 1)3 (x – 3)3 strictly increasing or decreasing.
Answer:
Given; f(x) = (x + 1)3 (x – 3)3
⇒ f'(x) = (x + 1)3 3(x – 3)2 + (x – 3)33(x + 1)2
= 3(x + 1)2(x – 3)2(x + 1 + x – 3)
= 3(x + 1)2(x – 3)2(2x – 2)
= 6(x +1)2 (x – 3)2 (x -1)
⇒ 6(x +1)2 (x – 3)2 (x – 1) = 0
⇒ x = -1, 1, 3
The intervals are
(-∞, -1), (-1, 1), (1, 3), (3, ∞)
f'(-2) = (-2 – 1) < 0
∴ Strictly decreasing in (-∞, -1)
f'(0) = (0 – 1) < 0
∴ Strictly decreasing in (-1, 1)
f'(2) = (2 – 1) > 0
∴ Strictly increasing in (1, 3)
f'(4) = (4 – 1) > 0
∴ Strictly increasing in (3, ∞).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 7.
Find the intervals in which the function f(x) = x + \(\frac{1}{x}\) strictly increasing or decreasing.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 8
⇒ x = ±1
The intervals are (-∞, -1), (-1, 1), (1, ∞)
f'(-2) > 0
∴ Strictly increasing in (-∞, -1)
f'(0) < 0
∴ Strictly decreasing in (-1, 1)
f'(2) > 0
∴ Strictly increasing in (1, ∞).

Question 8.
Determine whether the f(x) = x2 function is strictly monotonic on the indicated interval.

  1. (-1, 1)
  2. (-1, 0)
  3. (0, 1)

Answer:
f(x) = x2
⇒ f'(x) = 2x
⇒ f'(x) = 0 ⇒ 2x = 0 ⇒ x = 0
This turning point divides the domain into the intervals (-∞, 0); (0, ∞).

  1. Interval (-1,1) f'(x) < 0 and f'(x) > 0. So f(x) is not monotonic.
  2. Interval (-1,0), f'(x) < 0. ∴ f(x) is strictly monotonic.
  3. Interval (0, 1) f'(x) > 0 and f(x) is strictly monotonic.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 9.
Determine whether the f(x) = x3 – x function is strictly monotonic on the indicated interval.

  1. (-1, 0)
  2. (-1, -1/2)
  3. (-1, 1)

Answer:
(x) = x3 -x ⇒ f'(x) = 3x2 – 1
⇒ f'(x) = 0 ⇒ 3x2 – 1 = 0 ⇒ x = ±\(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)
This turning point divides the domain into the intervals (-∞, \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)); (-\(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\), \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)); (\(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\), ∞).

  1. Interval (-1, 0), f'(x) changes sign. So not monotonic.
  2. Interval (-1, -1/2), f'(x) > 0 strictly monotonic.
  3. lnterval(-1, 1) not monotonic

Question 10.
Find the approximate change in the volume V of a cube of side x meters caused by increasing the side by 1%.
Answer:
We have; V = x3 and ∆x = 1% of x= 0.01x
dV = \(\frac{d V}{d x}\) ∆x = 3x2∆x
= 3x2 × 0.01x = 0.03x3 = 0.03V
⇒ \(\frac{d V}{V}\) = 0.03
Therefore 3% is the approximate increase in volume.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 11.
If the radius of a sphere is measured as 7m with an error of 0.02m then find the approximate error in calculating its volume.
Answer:
Let r be the radius of the sphere and ∆r be the error in measuring the radius then r =7m and ∆r = 0.02 m
We have; V = \(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3
dV = \(\frac{d V}{dr}\) ∆r = \(\frac{4}{3}\) π3r2 × ∆r
= 4π(7)2 × 0.02 = 3.92 π m3.

Question 12.
The length of a rectangle is decreasing at the rate of 5 cm/min and the width is increasing at the rate of 4cm/min. When length is 8 cm and width is 6 cm, find the rate of change of its area.
Answer:
Let length = x and width = y
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 9

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 13.
Find the equation of tangents and normals to the given curves y= x4 – 6x3 + 13x2 – 10x + 5 at (0, 5)
Answer:
Given; y = x4 – 6x3 + 13x2 – 10x + 5 at (0, 5)
⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 4x3 – 18x2 + 26x – 10
Slope = \(\left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)_{x=0}\) = -10
Equation of tangent at (0, 5) is;
y – 5 =(-10)(x – 0)
⇒ y – 5 = -10x ⇒ 10x + y – 5 = 0
Equation of normal at (0, 5) is;
y – 5 = \(\frac{1}{10}\)(x – 0)
⇒ 10y – 50 = x ⇒ x – 10y + 50 = 0.

Question 14.
Find the equation of tangents and normals to the given curves y = x3 at (1, 1)
Answer:
Given; y = x3
⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 3x2
Slope = \(\left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)_{x=1}\) = 3
Equation of tangent at (1, 1) is; y -1 = (3)(x – 1)
⇒ y – 1 = 3x – 3 ⇒ 3x – y – 2 = 0
Equation of normal at (1, 1) is;
y – 1 = \(-\frac{1}{3}\)(x – 1)
⇒ 3y – 3 = -x + 1 ⇒ x+ 3y – 4 = 0.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 15.
The volume of a cube is increasing at the rate of 8cm3/s. How fast is the surface area increasing when the length of an edge is 12cm.
Answer:
Let V be the volume of the cube of side x.
We have volume = V = x3
Rate of change of volume with respect to time ‘t’ is;
ie; differentiating w.r.t t; \(\frac{d V}{d t}\) = 3x2\(\frac{d x}{d t}\)
Given; \(\frac{d V}{d t}\) = 8 and x = 12 ⇒ 8 = 3(12)2\(\frac{d x}{d t}\)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 10
Now let Surface area = S = 6x2
Differentiating w.r.t t;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 11

Question 16.
Find the intervals in which the function f(x) = -2x3 – 9x2 – 12x + 1 strictly increasing or decreasing.
Answer:
Given; f(x) = -2x3 – 9x2 – 12x + 1
⇒ f'(x) = -6x2 – 18x – 12
= – 6(x2 + 3x + 2)
= – 6(x + 2)(x +1)
⇒ f'(x) = 0 ⇒ -6(x + 2)(x +1) = 0
⇒ x = -2, -1
The intervals are (-∞, -2),(- 2, -1),(-1, ∞)
f'(-3) = -(-3 + 2)(-3 + 1) < 0
∴ Strictly decreasing in (-∞, -2)
f'(-1.5) = -(-1.5 + 2)(-1.5 + 1) > 0
∴ Strictly increasing in (- 2, -1)
f'(0) = -(0 + 2)(0 + 1) < 0
Strictly decreasing 1n(-1, ∞).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 17.
Find the local maxima and minima of the following functions. Also find the local maximum and minimum values. (each question carry 3 score)

  1. f(x) = sin x + cosx, 0 < x < \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
  2. f(x) = x3 – 3x
  3. f(x) = x3 – 6x2 + 9x + 15
  4. g(x) = \(\frac{x}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{x}\), x > 0
  5. g(x) = \(\frac{1}{x^{2}+2}\)

Answer:
1. Given; f(x) = sinx + cosx
⇒ f'(x) = cosx – sinx
For turning point f'(x) = 0
⇒ cosx – sinx = 0
⇒ cosx = sinx
⇒ x = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
f”(x) = -sin x – cosx
⇒ f (\(\frac{\pi}{4}\)) = -sin\(\frac{\pi}{4}\) – cos\(\frac{\pi}{4}\) < 0
Hence f(x) has a local maximum at x = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) and local maximum value is
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 12

2. Given; f(x) = x3 – 3x
⇒ f'(x) = 3x2 – 3
For turning point f'(x) = 0
⇒ 3x2 – 3 = 0
⇒ x = ±1
f”(x) = 6x
When x = -1
⇒ f”(-1) = -6 < 0
Hence f(x) has a local maximum at x = -1 and local maximum value is
f(-1) = (-1)3 – 3(-1) = -1 + 3 = 2
When x = 1
⇒ f”(1) = 6 > 0
Hence f(x) has a local minimum at x = 1 and local minimum value is
f(1) = (1)3 – 3(1) = 1 – 3 = -2.

3. Given; f(x) = x3 – 6x2 + 9x + 15
⇒ f'(x) = 3x2 – 12x + 9
For turning point f'(x) = 0
⇒ 3x2 – 12x + 9 = 0 ⇒ 3(x2 – 4x + 3) = 0
⇒ 3(x – 1)(x – 3) = 0 ⇒ x = 1, 3
f”(x) = 6x – 12
When x = 1
⇒ f”( 1) = 6 – 12 < 0
Hence f(x) has a local maximum at x = 1 and local maximum value is
f(1) = (1)3 – 6(1)2 + 9(1) + 15 = 19
When x = 3
⇒ f”(3) = 6(3) – 12 > 0
Hence f(x) has a local minimum at x = 3 and local minimum value is
f(3) = (3)3 – 6(3)2 + 9(3) + 15 = 15.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

4. Given; g(x) = \(\frac{x}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{x}\)
⇒ g'(x) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) – \(\frac{2}{x^{2}}\)
For turning point g'(x) = 0
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 13
Since x > 0, the acceptable value of x = 2
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 14
Hence g(x) has a local maximum at x = 2 and local maximum value is g(2) = \(\frac{2}{2}\) + \(\frac{2}{2}\) = 2

5. Given; g(x) = \(\frac{1}{x^{2}+2}\)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 15
For turning point g'(x) = 0
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 16
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 17
Hence g(x) has a local maximum at x = 2 and maximum value is g(2) = \(\frac{1}{0+2}=\frac{1}{2}\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 18.
Find the absolute maximum value and minimum value of the following functions.

  1. f(x) = x3, x ∈ [-2, 2]
  2. f(x) = 4x – \(\frac{x^{2}}{2}\), x ∈ \(\left[-2, \frac{9}{2}\right]\)

Answer:
1. Given; f(x) = x3 ⇒ f'(x) = 3x2
For turning point f'(x) = 0 ⇒ 3x2 = 0 ⇒ x = 0
f(- 2) = (-2 )3 = -8
f( 2) = (2)3 = 8
f(0) = (0)3 = 0
Absolute maximum = max{-8, 8, 0} = 8
Absolute minimum = min {-8, 8, 0} = – 8

2. Given; f(x) = 4x – \(\frac{x^{2}}{2}\) ⇒ f'(x) = 4 – x
For turning point f'(x) = 0 ⇒ 4 – x = 0
⇒ x = 4
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 18
Absolute maximum = max{-10, 8, 7.875} = 8
Absolute minimum = min {-10, 8, 7.87} = -10.

Question 19.
A television camera at ground level is filming the lift-off of a space shuttle that is rising vertically according to position equation S = 50t2.
The camera is 2000 feet from the launch pad. Find the rate of change in the angle of elevation of the camera 10 seconds after lift-off.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 19
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 20

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 20.
Determine whether the f(x) = sinx function is strictly monotonic on the indicated interval.

  1. (0, 2π)
  2. (0, π)
  3. (-π/2, π/2)

Answer:
f(x) = sinx ⇒ f'(x) = cosx changes sign.

  1. Interval (0, 2π). ∴ f(x) is not monotonic.
  2. f'(x) changes sign in (0, π) not monotonic.
  3. f'(x) > 0 in (-π/2, π/2), ie. f(x) is strictly monotonic.

Question 21.
Find the approximate change in the Surface Area of a cube of side x meters caused by decreasing the side by 1%.
Answer:
We have;
S = 6x2 and ∆x = 1% of x = -0.01x
dS = \(\frac{d S}{d x}\) ∆x = 6 × 2x × ∆x
= 6 × 2x × -0.01x = -0.02 × 6x2 = -0.02S
⇒ \(\frac{d S}{S}\) = -0.02
Therefore 2% is the approximate decrease in surface area.

Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The length ‘x’ of a rectangle is decreasing at the rate of 2 cm/s and the width ‘y’ is increasing at the rate of 2 cm/s.

  1. Find the rate of change of Perimeter.
  2. Find \(\frac{d A}{dt}\) when x = 12 cm and y = 5 cm.

Answer:
Since the length ‘x’ is decreasing and the width ‘y’ is increasing, we have \(\frac{d x}{dt}\) = -2 cm/s and \(\frac{d y}{dt}\)
= 2 cm/sec.
1. The Perimeter ‘P’ of the rectangle is given by
P = 2 (x + y)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 21

2. The area ‘A’ of the rectangle ‘A’ is given by
A = x.y
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 22
= 12(2) + 5(-2)
= 24 – 10 = 14 cm2/s.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 2.
Find the equation of all lines having slope -1. Which are tangents to the curve?
y = \(\frac{1}{x-1}\), x ≠ 1
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 23
⇒ x2 – 2x = 0 ⇒ x(x – 2) = 0 ⇒ x = 0, x = 2
At x = 0, y = -1
Equation of tangent at (0, -1) is;
At x = 2, y = \(\frac{1}{2-1}\) = 1
Equation of tangent at (2, 1) is; y – 1 = -1(x – 2)
⇒ y – 1 = -x + 2 ⇒ x + y – 3 = 0.

Question 3.
Find the points on the curve x2 + y2 – 2x – 3 = 0 at which the tangent are parallel to x-axis.
Answer:
Given; x2 + y2 – 2x – 3 = 0
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 24
Since the tangent is parallel to x-axis \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 0
\(\frac{1-x}{y}\) = 0 ⇒ x = 1
We have; (1)2 + y2 – 2(1) – 3 = 0
⇒ y2 = 4 ⇒ y = ±2
Hence the points are (1, 2), (1, -2).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 4.
Find the equation of the tangent to the curve y = \(\sqrt{3 x-2}\) which is parallel to the line 4x – 2y + 5 = 0.
Answer:
Slope of the line 4x – 2y + 5 = 0 is 2.
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 25
acceptable since y is positive.
Hence the point is \(\left(\frac{41}{48}, \frac{3}{4}\right)\)
Equation of tangent is;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 26
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 27
⇒ 6(4y – 3) = (48x – 41)
⇒ 24y – 18 = 48x – 41
⇒ 48x – 24y – 23 = 0.

Question 5.
Prove that the curve x = y2 and xy = k cut at right angles, if 8k2 = 1.
Answer:
x = y2 ___(1)
⇒ 1 = 2y \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) ⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = \(\frac{1}{2y}\)
xy = 2k ___(2)
⇒ x \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) + y.1 = 0 ⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = \(-\frac{y}{x}\)
The product of the slopes will be – 1.
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 28

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 6.
The gradient at any point (x, y) of a curve is 3x2 – 12 and the curve through the point (2, -7).

  1. Find the equation of the tangent at the point ( 2, -7 ). (2)
  2. Find the equation to the curve. (2)

Answer:
1. Given gradient as 3x2 – 12 ⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 3x2 – 12
Slope at (2, -7) is given by
\(\left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)_{x=2}\) = 3(2)2 – 12 = 0
Since slope is zero, the tangent is parallel to x – axis.
Here y = – 7 is the equation of the tangent at (2, -7).

2. Given, \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 3x2 – 12
⇒ ∫dy = ∫(3x2 – 12 )dx
y = 3\(\frac{x^{3}}{3}\) – 12x + c ⇒ y = x3 – 12x + c ____(1)
Given (2, -7) is a point on the curve.
(1) ⇒ -7 = (2)3 – 12(2) + c ⇒ -7 = 8 – 24 + c ⇒ c = 9
∴ Curve is y = x3 – 12x + 9.

Question 7.
Consider the curve x2/3 + y2/3 = 2

  1. Find the slope of the tangent to the curve at the point (1, 1). (2)
  2. Find the equation of the normal at the point (1, 1). (2)

Answer:
1. Given, x2/3 + y2/3 = 2,
Differentiating w.r.t. x,
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 29
⇒ slope of tangent = – 1.

2. Slope of normal = \(-\frac{1}{-1}\) = 1.
Equation of the normal is
y – 1 = 1(x – 1) ⇒ y – x = 0.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 8.
Find the intervals in which the function f given by f(x) = 2x3 – 3x2 – 36x + 7 is

  1. Strictly increasing. (2)
  2. Strictly decreasing. (2)

Answer:
Given; f(x) = 2x3 – 3x2 – 36x + 7
⇒ f'(x) = 6x2 – 6x – 36
f'(x) = 0 ⇒ 6x2 – 6x – 36 = 0
⇒ 6(x2 – x – 6) = 0
⇒ 6(x + 2)(x – 3) = 0 ⇒ x = -2, 3
The intervals are (-∞, -2),(- 2, 3), (3, ∞)
f'(-3) = 6(-3 + 2)(-3 – 3) > 0.
∴ Strictly increasing in (-∞, -2).
f'(0) = 6(2)(-3) < 0.
∴ Strictly decreasing in (- 2, 3).
f'(4) = 6(4 + 2)(4 – 3) > 0
∴ Strictly increasing in (3, ∞).

Question 9.
Use differentials to find the approximate value of \(\sqrt{0.6}\) up to 3 places of decimals.
Answer:
Take y = \(\sqrt{x}\), let x = 0.64 and ∆x = -0.04
Then; f(x) = y = \(\sqrt{x}\)
f(x + ∆x) = y + ∆y
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 30
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 31
(1) ⇒ \(\sqrt{0.6}\) = 0.8 – 0.025 = 0.775.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 10.
Use differentials to find the approximate value of (0.999)\(\frac{1}{10}\) up to 3 places of decimals.
Answer:
Take = x\(\frac{1}{10}\), let x = 1 and ∆x = -0.001
Then; f(x) = y
f(x + ∆x) = y + ∆y
(0.999)\(\frac{1}{10}\) = x\(\frac{1}{10}\) + ∆y
(0.999)\(\frac{1}{10}\) = (1)\(\frac{1}{10}\) + ∆y
⇒ (0.999)\(\frac{1}{10}\) = 1 + ∆y ______(1)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 32
(1) ⇒ (0.999)\(\frac{1}{10}\) = 1 – 0.0001 = 0.9999.

Question 11.
Use differentials to find the approximate value of (15)\(\frac{1}{4}\) up to 3 places of decimals.
Answer:
Takey = x\(\frac{1}{4}\), let x = 16 and ∆x = -1
Then; f(x) = y
f(x + ∆x) = y + ∆y
(15)\(\frac{1}{4}\) = x\(\frac{1}{4}\) + ∆y
(15)\(\frac{1}{4}\) = 16\(\frac{1}{4}\) + ∆y
(15)\(\frac{1}{4}\) = 2 + ∆y ____(1)
⇒ ∆y ≈ dy = \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) ∆x
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 33

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 12.
Use differentials to find the approximate value of (26.57)\(\frac{1}{3}\) up to 3 places of decimals.
Answer:
Take y = x\(\frac{1}{3}\), let x = 27 and ∆x = -0.43
Then; f(x) = y
f(x + ∆x) = y + ∆y
f(x + ∆x) = f(x) + ∆y
(26.57)\(\frac{1}{3}\) = 27\(\frac{1}{3}\) + ∆y .
⇒ (26.57)\(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3 + ∆y ____(1)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 34
(1) ⇒ (26.57)\(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3 – 0.016 = 2.984.

Question 13.
Find the approximate value of f(5.001) where f(x) = x3 – 7x2 + 15
Answer:
Let x = 5 and ∆x = 0.001
Then; f(x) = y
f(x + ∆x) = y + ∆y
f (5.001) = f(x) + ∆y
f(5.001) = f(5) + ∆y
f(5.001) = 53 – 7(5)2 + 15 + ∆y
⇒ f(5.001) = -35 + ∆y …
⇒ ∆y ≈ dy = \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) ∆x ⇒ dy = (3x2 – 14x) × 0.001
= (3(5)2 – 14(5)) × 0.001 = (75-70)0.001 = 0.005
(1) ⇒ f(5.001) = -35 + 0.005 = -34.995.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 14.
Find the approximate value of f(3.02) where f(x) = 3x2 + 5x + 3
Answer:
Let x = 3 and ∆x = 0.02
Then; f(x) = y
f(x + ∆x) = y + ∆y
f(3.02) = f(x) + ∆y
f(3.02) = f(3) + ∆y
f(3.02) = 3(3)2 + 5(2) + 3 + ∆y
⇒ f(3.02) = 45 + ∆y ____(1)
⇒ ∆y ≈ dy = \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) ∆x ⇒ dy = (6x + 5) × 0.02
= (6(3) + 5) × 0.02 = (18 + 5)0.02 = 0.46
(1) ⇒ f(3.02) = 45 + 0.46 = 45.46.

Question 15.
Consider the function y = f\(\sqrt{x}\)

  1. If x = 0.0036 and ∆x = 0.0001 find ∆y. (3)
  2. Hence approximate \(\sqrt{.0037}\) using differentials. (1)

Answer:
1. Let x = .0036, ∆x = 0.0001
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 35

2. (1) ⇒ \(\sqrt{.0037}\) = .000833 + .06 = .060833.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 16.
Find the approximate value of \(\sqrt[3]{124}\).
Answer:
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x}\) = x1/3 ⇒ f1(x) = 1/3x-2/3 = \(\frac{1}{3 x^{2 / 3}}\)
Let x = 125, ∆x = -1
Then; f(x) = y
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 36

Question 17.
Find two numbers x and y such that their sum is 35 and the product is x2 y5 a maximum.
Answer:
Given; x + y = 35 ⇒ y = 35 – x
P = x2 y5 ⇒ P = x2(35 – x)5
⇒ p’ = 2x(3 5 – x)5 + x2 5(35 – x)4(-1)
⇒ P’ = x(35 – x)4[2(35- x) – 5x]
⇒ p’ = x(35 – x)4[70 – 7x]
⇒ p’ = 7x(35 – x)4[10 – x]
⇒ p” = 7[x(3 5 – x)4 [-1] + x(10 – x)4(35 – x)3 (-1) + (35 – x)4(10 – x)]
For turning points P’ = 0
⇒ 7x(35 – x)4[10 – x] = 0
⇒ x = 0, 35, 10
x = 0, 35 can be rejected since correspondingly y will be y = 35, 0
⇒ P” = 7[10(35 – 10)4[-1]] < 0
Therefore maximum at x = 10
Thus the numbers are 10 and 35 – 10= 10.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 18.
Using differentials, find the approximate value of (63)1/3.
Answer:
Take y = x\(\frac{1}{3}\), let x = 64 and ∆x = 1
Then; f(x) = y
f(x + ∆x) = y + ∆y
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 37

Question 19.

  1. Find the point on the curve y = x3 – 10x + 8 at which the tangent is parallel to the line y = 2x + 1. (2)
  2. Is the given line tangent to the curve? Why?

Answer:
1. \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 3x2 – 10
Slope of the line y = 2x +1 is 2
⇒ 3x2 – 10 = 2 ⇒ 3x2 = 12 ⇒ x = ±2
When x = 2
y = 23 – 10 × 2 + 8 = 8 – 20 + 8 = -4
When x = – 2
y = (-2)3 -10 × (-2) + 8 = -8 + 20 + 8 = 20
Therefore the points are (2, -4); (-2, 20)

2. No. Since (2, -4); (-2, 20) does not satisfies the equation y = 2x +1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 20.
Suppose that a spherical balloon is inflated and it has volume ‘v’ and radius ‘r’ at time ‘t’.

  1. If the balloon is inflated by pumping 900c.c. of gas per second. Find the rate a which the radius of the balloon is increasing when the radius is 15 cm. (2)
  2. Find the rate of change of its surface at the instant when it radius is 15 cm. (2)

Answer:
1. Let V be the volume of the sphere of radius r.
V = \(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3, given; \(\frac{d V}{d t}\) = 900, r = 15
Differentiating w.r.t t,
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 38

2. Let ‘s’ denote the surface area of the balloon, then
S = 4πr2
Differentiating, \(\frac{d s}{d t}\) = 4π.2r.\(\frac{d r}{d t}\) =8.π r .\(\frac{d r}{d t}\)
= 8π × 15 × \(\frac{1}{\pi}\) = 120 cm2/sec.

Question 21.
Use differentials to find the approximate value of (0.009)\(\frac{1}{3}\) up to 3 places of decimals.
Answer:
Take y = x\(\frac{1}{3}\), let x = 0.008 and ∆x = 0.001
Then; F(x) = Y
f(x + ∆x) = y + ∆y
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 39

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 22.
Find the approximate value of \(\sqrt{401}\).
Answer:
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\) = x1/2
f'(x) = \(\frac{1}{2 \sqrt{x}}\)
Let x = 400 ∆x = 1
f(x) = y = \(\sqrt{x}\)
f(x + ∆x) = y + ∆y
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 40

Question 23.
Consider y = \(\frac{\log x}{x}\), in (0, ∞)

  1. Find the value of x at which \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 0 (2)
  2. Find the maximum value.

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 41

2.
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 42
∴ y is maximum when x = e.
The maximum value is \(\frac{1}{e}\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 24.
Find the point on the curve y = x3 – 11x + 5 at which the tangent is y = x – 11.
Answer:
Slope of the line y = x – 11 is 1.
Given; y = x3 – 11x + 5 ⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 3x2 – 11 = 1
⇒ 3x2 = 12 ⇒ x = ±2
At x = 2, ⇒ y = x – 11 = 2- 11 = -9
⇒ (2, -9)
At x = -2, ⇒ y = x – 11 = -2 – 11 = -13
⇒ (-2, -13)
But the point (-2, -13) do not lie on the curve, hence the point is (2, -9).

Question 25.
Consider the curve y = x2 – 2x + 7

  1. Find the slope of the tangent of the curve at x = 2. (2)
  2. Write down the equation of the tangent at x =2. (2)

Answer:
1. Given, y = x2 – 2x + 7 ⇒ y’ = 2x – 2
(y’)x=2 = 2(2) – 2 = 2.

2. At x = 2 , y = 22 – 2(2) + 7 = 7.
Equation of the tangent at (2, 7) is
y – 7 = 2(x – 2) ⇒ 2x – y + 3 = 0.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 26.
Find the absolute maximum value and minimum value of the following functions.

  1. f(x) = 2x3 – 15x2 + 36x + 1, x ∈ [1, 5]
  2. f(x) = 12x\(\frac{4}{3}\) – 6x\(\frac{1}{3}\), x ∈ [-1, 1]

Answer:
1. Given; f(x) = 2x3 – 15x2 + 36x + 1, x ∈ [1, 5]
⇒ f'(x) = 6x2 – 30x + 36
For turning point f'(x) = 0 ⇒ 6x2 – 30x + 36 = 0
⇒ x2 – 5x + 6 = 0 ⇒ (x -3)(x – 2) = 0
⇒ x = 3, 2
f(1) = 2(1)3 – 15(1)2 + 36(1) + 1 = 24
f(2) = 2(2)3 – 15(2)2 + 36(2) + 1 = 29
f(3) = 2(3)3 – 15(3)2 + 36(3) + 1 = 28
f(5) = 2(5)3 – 15(5)2 + 36(5) + 1 = 56
Absolute maximum = max {24, 29, 28, 56} = 56
Absolute minimum = min {24, 29, 28, 56} = 24

2. Given;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 43
f'(x) = 0 at x = \(\frac{1}{8}\) and f'(x) is not defined at x = 0. Therefore;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 44
Absolute maximum = max {18, 0, 6, \(-\frac{9}{4}\)} = 18
Absolute minimum = min {18, 0, 6, \(-\frac{9}{4}\)} = \(-\frac{9}{4}\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 27.
Consider the function y = x3 – 6x2 + 3x – 1

  1. Find the slope at x= -1. (1)
  2. Find the minimum gradient of the above curve. (3)

Answer:
1. Given,
y = x3 – 6x2 + 3x – 1 ⇒ y’ = 3x2 – 12x + 3
Gradient at (x = -1) = (y’)x=1 = 3(-1)2 – 12(-1) + 3 = 18.

2. Now for minimum gradient we have to apply maxima – minima condition to the function y’ .ie, y” = 6x – 12 , for turning points of y’ is given by y” = 0.
Therefore, 6x – 12 = 0 ⇒ x = 2
Now, y”’ = 6 > 0
∴ y’ is maximum at x = 2.
Minimum gradient at (x = 2) is
= 12 – 24 + 3 = – 9.

Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives Six Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A curve passes through the origin, and its gradient function is 2x – \(\frac{x^{2}}{2}\)

  1. Find its y coordinate when x= 2. (4)
  2. Find the equation of the tangent at x= 2. (2)

Answer:
Given;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 45
Integrating we have; ∫dy = ∫(2x – \(\frac{x^{2}}{2}\))dx
⇒ y = x2 – \(\frac{x^{3}}{6}\) + c ___(1)
Since the curve passes through (0, 0)
(1) ⇒ 0 = 0 + c ⇒ c = 0
∴ Equation of the curve is y = x2 – \(\frac{x^{3}}{6}\)
When x = 2 ⇒ y = 22 – \(\frac{2^{3}}{6}\) = \(\frac{8}{3}\)
∴ coordinate is (2, \(\frac{8}{3}\)).

2. Slope at (2, \(\frac{8}{3}\)) = 2 × 2 – \(\frac{2^{2}}{2}\) = 2
∴ Equation of the tangent at (2, \(\frac{8}{3}\)) is given by
y – \(\frac{8}{3}\) = 2(x – 2) ⇒ 3y – 8 = 6x – 12 ⇒ 3y = 6x – 4.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 2.
(i) Choose the correct answer from the bracket. The slope of the tangent to the curve y = x3 – 2x + 3 at x = 1 is ____(1)
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 3
(ii) Find points on the curve \(\frac{x^{2}}{25}+\frac{y^{2}}{9}\) = 1 at which the tangents are (2)
(a) Parallel to x-axis
(b) parallel to y – axis.
(iii) Use differential to approximate \(\sqrt{25.6}\). (3)
Answer:
(i) (b) 1, Since
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 46

(ii)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 47
(a) \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 0, since tangents are parallel to x- axis.
\(\frac{-9x}{25}\) = 0, x = 0 ∴ y = ± 3;
The points are (0, 3) and (0, -3)

(b) \(\frac{-25 y}{9 x}\) = 0, since tangents are parallel to y-axis, slope of normal = 0; y = o
∴ x = ± 5
The points are (5, 0) and (-5, 0)

(iii) Take y = \(\sqrt{x}\) , let x = 25 and ∆x = 0.6
Then; f(x) = y = \(\sqrt{x}\)
f(x + ∆x) = y + ∆y
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 48

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 3.
Let x and y be the length and breadth of the rectangle ABCD in a circle having radius r. Let ∠CAB = θ (Ref. figure). If ∆ represent area of the rectangle and r is a constant.
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 49

  1. Write ∆ in terms of r and θ. (2)
  2. Find \(\frac{d \Delta}{d \theta}\) and \(\frac{d^{2} \Delta}{d \theta^{2}}\). (1)
  3. Hence find the maximum value of ∆. (2)
  4. Show that the rectangle of maximum area that can be inscribed in a circle of radius r is a square of side \(\sqrt{2} r\). (1)

Answer:
1. Area of the rectangle is ∆ = xy
From the figure y = 2r sinθ, x = 2r cosθ
∆ = xy = 4r2sinθcosθ = 2r2sin2θ

2. \(\frac{d \Delta}{d \theta}\) = 4r2 cos2θ ⇒ \(\frac{d^{2} \Delta}{d \theta^{2}}\) = -8r2sin2θ

3. For turning points
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 50
Therefore local maximum at θ = \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)

4. Then;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 51
Hence the rectangle becomes a square.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 4.
The second derivative of the equation of a curve is given by the equation x \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d x^{2}}\) = 1, given y = 1, \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 0 when x= 1.

  1. Find the slope at x = e. (2)
  2. Find the equation of the curve. (2)
  3. Find the equation of the normal at x= e. (2)

Answer:
1. Given;
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 52
Integrating we get,
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 53
∴ Slope of the curve at x = e is given by
\(\left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)_{x=e}\) = loge = 1.

2. We have,
\(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = logx, ⇒ dy = logxdx
Integrating we get,
∫dy = ∫logx dx ⇒ y = logx.x – ∫\(\frac{1}{x}\).x dx + c2
⇒ y = xlogx – x + c2 ____(2)
Given; y = 1 when x = 1
(2) ⇒ 1 = 1log1 – 1 + c2 ⇒ 1 = 0 – 1 + c2 ⇒ c2 = 2
Therefore the equation of the curve is
y = xlogx – x + 2

3. We have, y = xlogx – x + 2
When x = e
⇒ y = e log e – e + 2 ⇒ y = e – e + 2 = 2
So we have to find the slope at (e, 2),
We know; \(\left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)_{x=e}\) = log e = 1
∴ Slope of the normal at (e, 2)= -1
∴ Equation of the normal at (e, 2) is.
y – 2 = (-1) (x – e)
y – 2 = – x + e ⇒ y + x = e + 2.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 5.
The given figure represents a cylinder Inscribed in a sphere.
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 54

  1. Find an expression for the volume V of the cylinder. (2)
  2. Find the height of the cylinder when its volume V is maximum. (2)
  3. Find the volume and radius of the largest cylinder. (2)

Answer:
1. From the right triangle ∆OAB,
y2 = R2 – x2 ⇒ y = \(\sqrt{R^{2}-x^{2}}\)
Which is the radius of the cylinder
Also height = 2 x
∴ Volume = V= π y2 × 2x = 2π(R2 – x2)x = 2π(R2x – x3).

2. Now,
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 55
For maximum or minimum,
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 56
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 57

3. Base radius =
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 58

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 6.
If f(x) = x3 + 3x2 – 9x + 4 is a real function

  1. Find the intervals in which the function is increasing or decreasing. (3)
  2. Find the points of local maxima or local minima of f(x) (2)
  3. Graph of a function is given in the following figure:

Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 59
Which among the following represents the graph of its derivative? (1)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 60
Answer:
1. f'(x) = 3x2 + 6x – 9
For turning points f'(x) = 3x2 + 6x – 9 = 0
⇒ x = 1, -3
These turning point divide the domain of f(x) in the following intervals. (-∞, -3), (-3, 1), (1, ∞) in (-∞, -3)
⇒ f'(-4) = 3(-4)2 + 6(-4) – 9 > 0
Hence increasing.
In (-3, 1) ⇒ f'(0) = 3(0)2 + 6(0) – 9 < 0
Hence decreasing.
In (1, ∞) ⇒ f'(2) = 3(2)2 + 6(2) – 9 > 0
Hence increasing.

2. x = -3 is a local maximum point and x = 1 is a local minimum point.

3. (a)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 61
The function passes through origin and has a local maximum at x = 2.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 7.
Of all the Cylinders with given surface area, show that the volume is maximum when height is equal to the diameter of the base.
Answer:
Let r be the radius, h be the height, V be the volume and S be the surface area
S = 2πr2 + 2 πrh
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 62
S – 6πr2 = 0
2πr2 + 2πrh – 6πr2 = 0
So h = 2r
So volume is maximum when h = 2r.

Question 8.
Sand is pouring from a pipe. The falling sand forms a Cone on the ground in such a way that the height of the Cone is always one-sixth of the radius of the base.

  1. Establish a relation between the volume ‘v’ and height ‘h’ of the Cone using the given condition. (2)
  2. lf the sand is pouring at the rate of -12 cm/sec, Find the rate of change of height of the Cone. (2)
  3. Find \(\frac{\mathrm{dh}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) when h = 4cm. (2)

Answer:
1. Given that the height of the Cone is one-sixth of the radius of the base, then h = \(\frac{r}{6}\) ⇒ r = 6h
Then Volume V = \(\frac{1}{3}\) πr2h = \(\frac{1}{3}\) π(6h)2.h
V = \(\frac{1}{3}\) π 36h2.h = \(\frac{1}{3}\) π 36h3
V =12 πh3 ____(1)

2. Differentiating (1) we get
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 63

3. When h = 4 cm
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 64

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 9.
(i) Choose the correct answer from the bracket. The rate of change of the area of a circle with respect to its radius r at r = 10cm is.
(a) 10π
(b) 20π
(c) 30π
(d) 40π (1)
(ii) Find the intervals in which the function f given by f(x) = x2 – 6x + 5 is (2)
(a) Strictly increasing
(b) Strictly decreasing
(iii) Find the local minimum and local maximum value, if any, of the function f(x) = x3 – 6x2 + 9x + 8 (3)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 65

(ii) f'(x) = 2x — 6; 2x – 6 = 0; x = 3
(-∞, 3 ) is strictly decreasing
(3, ∞) is strictly increasing.

(iii) f'(x) = 3x2 – 12x + 9
f11 = 6x — 12
For maxima, minima
f1 = 0 → 3x2 – 12x + 9 = 0
3(x – 3)(x — 1) = 0; x = 3, x = 1
At x = 3 f11(x) = 6 × 3 – 12 = 18 – 12 = 6 > 0
f is minimum, the local minimum value of f = 8
At x = 1 f11(x) = 6 × 1 – 12 = -6 < 0,
f is maximum, the local maximum value of f = 12.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 10.
A wire of length 28m is cut into two pieces. One of the pieces is be made into a square and the other into a circle. What should be the length of the two pieces so that combined area of the square and the circle is minimum using differentiation?
Answer:
Let the length of one piece be ‘x’ and other piece be ‘28 – x’. Let from the first piece we will make a circle of radius Y and from the second piece we will make a square of side y. Then,
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 66
Let A be the combined area of the circle and square, then
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 67

Question 11.
An open box of maximum volume is to be made from a square piece of tin sheet 24cm on a side by cutting equal squares from the corners and turning of the sides.
(i) Complete the following table. (2)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 68
(ii) Using the above table, express V as a function of x and determine its domain. (1)
(iii) Find height (x. cm) of the box when volume V is maximum by differentiation. (3)
Answer:
(i)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 69

(ii) Generalise the above table as a function.
V = x(24-2x)2, 0 < x < 12.

(iii) \(\frac{d V}{d x}\) = x.2(24 – 2x)(-2) + (24 – 2x)2
= -4x(24 – 2x) + (24 – 2x)2
= -96x + 8x2 + 576 + 4x2 – 96x
= 12x2 – 192x + 576
For maximum or minimum,
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 70
Therefore volume is maximum when x = 4 cm.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 12.
A square tank of capacity 250 m3 has to be dug out. The cost of land is Rs. 50 per m2. The cost of digging increases with the depth and for the whole tank is Rs. 400 × (depth)2.

  1. Find an expression for the cost of digging the tank. (3)
  2. Find the dimension of the tank when the total cost is least. (3)

Answer:
1. Let x, x and y be the length, breadth, and depth of the tank.
Then, V = x. x. y = 250 ⇒ y = \(\frac{250}{x^{2}}\).
Area of land = x2
⇒ Cost of land = 50 x2
(∵ cost of land is Rs.50/m2)
Cost of digging = 400 × (depth)2 = 400 × (y)2
∴ Total cost = C = 50 x2 + 400 × (y)2
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 71

2. We have, C = 50x2 + \(\frac{400 \times(250)^{2}}{x^{4}}\).
Differentiating w.r.t.x, we get,
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 72
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 73
∴ Maximum at x = 10
m ⇒ when x = 10m and
y = \(\frac{250}{10^{2}}\) = 2.5m the total cost is least.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 13.
Show that the right circular cone of least curved surface and given volume has an altitude equal to \(\sqrt{2}\) times the radius of the base.
Answer:
Volume of the cone will be, V =\(\frac{1}{3}\)πr2h
h = \(\frac{3 V}{\pi r^{2}}\) ____(1)
Curved surface area will be, S = πrl
⇒ S2 = π2r2l2 = P
⇒ P = π2r2(h2 + r2) ⇒ P = π2r2h2 + π2r4)
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 74
⇒ 2r2 = h2 ⇒ h = \(\sqrt{2} r\).

Question 14.
Let ABC be an isosceles triangle inscribed in a circle having radius r. Then by figure, area of the triangle ABC is ∆
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 75

  1. Find \(\frac{d \Delta}{d \theta}\) and \(\frac{d^{2} \Delta}{d \theta^{2}}\) (2)
  2. Find the maximum value of ∆. (3)
  3. Show that the isosceles triangle of maximum area that can be in scribed in a given circle is an equilateral triangle. (1)

Answer:
1. Area of the isosceles triangle is ∆ = \(\frac{1}{2}\)bh
From the figure b = r sin2θ, h = r + r cos2θ
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 76

2. For turning points
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 77
Therefore local maximum a θ = \(\frac{\pi}{6}\) which means the area of the isosceles triangle is maximum When θ = \(\frac{\pi}{6}\).

3. Then; ∠OCB = 30° ⇒ ∠ACB = 2∠OCB = 60°. Therefore the isosceles triangle is an equilateral triangle.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 15.
(i) Using the graph of the function f (x) in the interval [ a, h ] match the following.
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 78

A – PointB – Nature
x = aAbsolute maximum
x = bAbsolute minimum
x = eLocal maximum
x = dLocal minimum
Point of inflexion.

(ii) Consider the function f(x) = 3x4 – 8x3 + 12x2 – 48x + 25
(a) Find the turning points of f(x). (1)
(b) Explain the nature of the turning points (1)
(c) Find the absolute extreme values of f(x). (2)
Answer:
(i)

A – PointB – Nature
x = aAbsolute minimum
x = bLocal maximum
x = ePoint of inflexion
x = dAbsolute maximum

(ii) (a) f(x) = 12x3 – 24x2 + 24x – 48
For turning points,
f'(x) = 0 ⇒ 12x3 – 24x2 + 24x – 48 = 0
⇒ x3 – 2x2 + 2x – 4 = 0
⇒ (x2 + 2)(x – 2) = 0 ⇒ x = ± (\(\sqrt{-2}\), 2)
We admit only x = 2 as x = \(\sqrt{-2}\) is not a real number.
Therefore at x = 2 f (x) has a turning point.

(b) f”(x) = 36x2 – 48x + 24
⇒ f”(2) = 36(2)2 – 48 × 2 + 24 > 0
Therefore at x = 2 f(x) has a local minimum.

(c) f(0) = 25,
f(2) = 3(2)4 – 8(2)3 + 12(2)2 – 48 × 2 + 25 = -39
f(3) = 3(3)4 – 8(3)3 + 12(3)2 – 48 × 3 + 25 = 16
Consider the set { f (0), f{2), f (3)}
⇒ {25, -39, 16}
The maximum value of the above set is the absolute maximum and it is 25 at x = 0. The minimum value of the above set is the absolute minimum and it is -39 at x = 2.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 16.
An open box with a square base is to be made out of a given quantity of sheet of area a2.

  1. If the box has side x units, then show that volume V= \(\frac{a^{2} x-x^{3}}{4}\) (2)
  2. Show that the maximum volume is \(\frac{a^{3}}{6 \sqrt{3}}\) (4)

Answer:
1. Area = a2 = x2 + 4xh,
h = height of the box.
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 79
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 80

2. We have,
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 81

Question 17.
For the function f(x) = sin2x, 0 < x < π
(i) Find the point between 0 and π that satisfies f'(x) = 0. (2)
(ii) Find the point of local maxima and local minima. (2)
(iii) Find the local maximum and local minimum value. (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 82
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 83
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 84

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 18.
A cylindrical can with a volume of 125m3 (about 2 litres) is to be made by cutting its top and bottom from metal squares and forming its curved side by bending a rectangular sheet of metal to match its ends. What radius ‘r’ and height ‘h’ of the can will minimize the amount of material required.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 85
The circular top and bottom should be cut out from a square metal sheet of side 2r. Therefore the area of squares is 8r2.
Area A = 8r2 + 2πrh
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 86
∴ To minimize the amount of material, r = 2.5
\(h=\frac{125}{\pi(2.5)^{2}}=6.3\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Application of Derivatives

Question 19.
A rectangle sheet of tin with adjascent sides 45cm and 24cm is to be made into a box • without top, by cutting off equal squares from the comers and folding up the flaps

  1. Taking the side of the square cut off as x, express the volume of the box as the function of x. (2)
  2. For what value of x, the volume of the box will be maximum. (4)

Answer:
1. Length of the box = 45 – 2x
Breadth of the box = 24 – 2x
Height of the box = x
Volume; V = (45 – 2x)(24 – 2x)x
= (1080 – 138x + 4x2)x
= 4x3 – 138x2 + 1080x.

2. \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 12x2 – 276x + 1080
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 87
12x2 – 276x + 1080 = 0
x2 – 23x + 90 = 0
x = 18, 5
x = 18 is impossible
∴ x = 5 when x = 5, \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d x^{2}}\) < 0
Plus Two Maths Application of Derivatives 3 Mark Questions and Answers 88
The volume of the box is maximum at x = 5.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Students can Download Chapter 11 Advances in Computing Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Plus Two Computer Science Advances in Computing One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which among the following are true regarding distributed computing?
i) Different parts of a program are run simultaneously on two or more computers.
ii) Distributed systems fail even if one node fails to function.
iii) A lot of extra programming is required to set up a distributed system.
iv) All the different processors share memory.
(a) i & ii are correct
(b) iii & iv are correct
(c) i & iii are correct
(d) ii & iv are correct
Answer:
(c) i & iii are correct

Question 2.
______ computing provides users access to computational power just like electricity through wall sockets.
(a) Parallel
(b) Grid
(c) Cluster
(d) Serial
Answer:
(b) Grid

Question 3.
A pattern or a model in the study of any subject of complexity is called ______.
Answer:
paradigm

Question 4.
____ is a method of computing in which large problems can be divided into smaller ones and this smaller one are distributed among several computers.
Answer:
distributed computing.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 5.
_____ is the advantage of distributed computing where we can add computers according to the workload.
Answer:
Scalability.

Question 6.
Multiple processors are used in _____ computing
(a) serial
(b) parallel
(c) standalone
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) parallel

Question 7.
Single processor is used in _____ computing.
(a) serial
(b) parallel
(c) standalone
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) serial

Question 8.
One instruction is executed on a single processor at any moment in _____ computing.
Answer:
Serial.

Question 9.
More than one instruction is executed on multiple processors at any moment of time in _____ computing.
Answer:
Parallel.

Question 10.
_____ is the fastest supercomputer used by Indian Institute of Tropical meteorology
Answer:
ADITYA

Question 11.
______ computing uses millions of computers and in which computational power(resources, services, data) is readily available like electric power.
Answer:
Grid computing.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 12.
Here a group of Internet-connected computers, storage devices, etc are linked together and work like a single computer. Which is this computing
Answer:
Cluster computing

Question 13.
It is an emerging computing technology. Herewith the use of Internet and central remote servers to maintain data and applications. Name this computing
Answer:
Cloud computing.

Question 14.
From the following which is not the cloud service model
(a) SaaS
(b) PaaS
(c) laaS
(d) NaaS
Answer:
(d) NaaS

Question 15.
SaaS stands for _____.
Answer:
Software as a Service

Question 16.
PaaS stands for _____.
Answer:
Platform as a Service.

Question 17.
laaS stands for _____.
Answer:
Infrastructure as a Service.

Question 18.
Expand LAMP
Answer:
Linux, Apache Server, MySQL, and PHP.

Question 19.
Al stands for _____.
Answer:
Artificial Intelligence

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 20.
The first definition of Artificial Intelligence was established by _______.
Answer:
Alan Turing.

Question 21.
Al was first coined by ______ in 1956.
Answer:
John MacCarthy

Question 22.
With the help of _____ computer can solve the tasks such as playing chess, proving mathematical theorems, natural language processing, medical diagnosis, etc.
Answer:
Artificial Intelligence.

Question 23.
____ is a test of a machine’s ability to exhibit intelligent behaviour equivalent to, or indistinguishable from, that of a human.
Answer:
Turing Test.

Question 24.
NLP stands for _____.
Answer:
Natural Language Processor.

Question 25.
ASR stands for _____.
Answer:
Automatic Speech Recognition

Question 26.
OCR stands for
Answer:
Optical Character Recognition

Question. 27
HCR stands for _____.
Answer:
Handwritten Character Recognition.

Question. 28
GIS stands for ______.
Answer:
Geographical Information System.

Question. 29
CAD stands for ______.
Answer:
Computer-Aided Design

Question. 30
Which of the following is not a distributed computing paradigm?
(a) grid
(b) cloud
(c) cluster
(d) serial
Answer:
(d) serial

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question. 31
The study of control and communication between man and machine is called _____.
Answer:
Cybernetics

Question. 32
In Artificial Intelligence, ANN stands for
(a) Artificial Network of Neural.
(b) Advanced Neural Network
(c) Artificial Neural Network
(d) Architectural Neural Network
Answer:
(c) Artificial Neural Network

Question 33.
Which among the following is the capability that is required by a computer to pass Turing Test?
i. Natural Language Processing (NLP)
ii. Knowledge representation
iii. Machine learning
iv. Computer Vision
(a) i & ii only
(b) i.ii & iii only
(c) iii & iv only
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Plus Two Computer Science Advances in Computing Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Differentiate the terms intelligence and wisdom.
Answer:
The ability to draw useful inferences from the available knowledge is generally referred as intelligence. Wisdom is the maturity of mind that directs its intelligence to achieve desirable goals.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 2.
Find the suitable match.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing img1
Answer:
1 – c
2 – d
3 – b
4 – a

Question 3.
Find the suitable match.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing img2
Answer:
1 – b
2 – c
3 – d
4 – a

Question 4.
Classify the following as SaaS, PaaS, and laaS. Adobe Creative Cloud. Google App Engine, Microsoft Office 365, Amazon Web Services.
Answer:

  • SaaS: Adobe Creative Cloud, Microsoft Office 365
  • PaaS: Google App Engine
  • laaS: Amazon Web Services

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 5.
Question Text:
Pick the odd one out. The services of cloud computing include:
(a) Software as a Service
(b) Hardware as a Service
(c) Platform as a Service
(d) Infrastructure as a Service
Answer:
(b) Hardware as a Service. The others are cloud computing paradigm

Question 6.
Question Text:
State whether the following statements are true or false.

  1. Clusters provide computational power through parallel processing.
  2. Even if anyone of the computers fails, cluster computing as a whole will work.

Answer:

  1. True
  2. True

Question 7.
The following organisations plan to buy cloud computing service for their IT requirements. Suggest the cloud computing model that suits their need.

  1. Hari & Co. requires spreadsheets and presentation software.
  2. Tomy & Co. requires to install their own software for their accounting needs in a LAMP platform.
  3. Raju & Co. requires to use MySQL for their database needs.
  4. Joy & Co. requires 1 TB hard disk space, 2 GB RAM and processing power.

Answer:

  1. SaaS
  2. PaaS
  3. SaaS
  4. laaS

Question 8.
Consider the following statements about distributed computing and state True/False.
1. In distributed computing, parts of a program are run simultaneously from two or more computers which are communicating with each other.
2. WWW is an example for large distributed computing.
Answer:

  1. True
  2. True

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 9.
Parallel computing is faster than serial computing. Mention the limitations in implementing parallel computing.
Answer:
Disadvantages:

  • Implementing this is more complex than serial application
  • Significant changes must be made to make the programs machine-independent

Question 10.
What do you mean by Distributed computing?
Answer:
Distributed computing is a method of computing in which large problems can be divided into smaller ones and these smaller ones are distributed among several computers. The solution for the smaller ones are computed separately and simultaneously. Finally, the results are assembled to get the desired overall solution.

Plus Two Computer Science Advances in Computing Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Differentiate between Bioinformatics and Biometrics.
Answer:
1. Biometrics:
Biometrics refers to the unique characteristics of a human being to recognize an individual such as fingerprints, face recognition, iris, retina, etc. Biometrics are used to record attendance
Eg. In banks, employee login is restricted by using fingerprint reader

2. Bioinformatics:
It is a computer technology to the management of biological information. By the help of a computer analyse the fingerprints, DNA, iris, retina, etc and identifying the concerned person.

Question 2.
Briefly explain the Turing test.
Answer:
The Turing test is a test of a machine’s ability to exhibit intelligent behaviour equivalent to, or indistinguishable from, that of a human. The test involves a human judge engages in natural language conversations with a human and a machine designed to generate performance indistinguishable from that of a human being.

All participants are separated from one another. If the judge cannot reliably tell the machine from the human, the machine is said to have passed the test. The test does not check the ability to give the correct answer to questions; it checks how closely the answer resembles typical human answers. Turing predicted that by 2000 computer would pass the test.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 3.
Draw the knowledge pyramid and briefly explain the terms in it.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing img3
Data is termed as a collection of mere symbols. While processing data we get information and knowledge is the organized information. It can be a piece of information that helps in decision making. The ability to draw useful inferences from the available knowledge is generally referred as intelligence. Wisdom is the maturity of mind that directs its intelligence to achieve desirable goals.

Question 4.
Compare grid computing and cloud computing paradigms of distributed computing.
Answer:
1. Grid computing:
It is a system in which millions of computers, smartphones, satellites, telescopes, cameras, sensors, etc. are connected each other as a cyber world in which computational power (resources, services, data) is readily available like electric power. Any information at any time at any place can be made available in our fingertips. This is used in disaster management, weather forecasting, market forecasting, bio information, etc.

2. Cloud computing:
It is an emerging computing technology. Herewith the use of Internet and central remote servers to maintain data and applications. Example for this is Email service, Office Software(word processor, spreadsheets, presentations, database, etc), graphics software, etc. The information is placed in a central remote server just like clouds in the sky hence the name cloud computing

Question 5.
What is cluster computing? Write its advantages and disadvantages.
Answer:
Cluster means groups. Here a group of Internet-connected computers, storage devices, etc are linked together and work like a single computer. It provides computational power through parallel processing. Its cost is less and used for scientific applications.

Advantages

  • Price-performance ratio: The performance is high ‘ and the cost is less.
  • Availability: If one group of system fails the other group will do the work.
  • Scalability: Computers can be easily added according to the workload increases.

Disadvantages

  • Programmability issues: Different computers uses different software and hardware hence the issues.
  • Problem in finding fault: Fault detection is very difficult

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 6.
The distributed computing method has some advantages and disadvantages. What are they?
Answer:
Advantages

  • Economical: Reduces the computing cost hence it is economical
  • Speed: The workload of the entire system is less hence the speed is high.
  • Reliability: When one computer in the network fails the entire work will not be blocked, i.e. the other computers will do the work properly.
  • Scalability: We can add computers according to the workload.

Disadvantages

  • Complexities: The proper division of the problems and reassembling of the result is a major complex task.
  • Security: Security measurements to be taken to keep track of the sent data packets otherwise it can be used for illegal purposes.
  • Network reliance: Some occasions in case of network failure, the entire system may become unstable.

Question 7.
Most of the companies are opting for cloud computing for their IT requirement. Explain the advantages that they gain from this.
Answer:
Advantages

  • Cost savings: Companies can reduce costs by using cloud computing
  • scalability/ Flexibility: More resources are used when the workload increases.
  • Reliability: It is reliable and helps in disaster recovery
  • Maintenance: The service provider do system maintenance, then reducing maintenance requirements.
  • Mobile accessible: Employees can do their job even when they are in move.

Question 8.
Match the following.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing img4
Answer:
i – b
ii – c
iii – d
iv – a

Question 9.
Explain the advantages and disadvantages of distributed computing.
Answer:
Advantages

  • Economical: Reduces the computing cost hence it is economical
  • Speed: The workload of the entire system is less hence the speed is high.
  • Reliability: When one computer in the network fails the entire work will not be blocked, i.e. the other computers will do the work properly.
  • Scalability: We can add computers according to the workload.

Disadvantages

  • Complexities: The proper division of the problems and reassembling of the result is a major complex task.
  • Security: Security measurements to be taken to keep track of the sent data packets otherwise it can be used for illegal purposes.
  • Network reliance: Some occasions in case of network failure, the entire system may become unstable.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 10.
Write down the merits and demerits of parallel computing.
Answer:
Advantages

  • If one or more node fails, the entire system will not failed instead it works with reduced performance. This method is called fault tolerance.
  • Sharing computing power and storage resources with each other.
  • Distributing tasks to different nodes hence reduce the load of entire system. It is called load sharing
  • Scaling can be easily done.

Disadvantages

  • Implementing this is more complex than serial application
  • Significant changes must be made to make the programs machine-independent

Question 11.
Explain Grid computing with merits and demerits.
Answer:
It is a system in which millions of computers, smartphones, satellites, telescopes, cameras, sensors, etc. are connected each other as a cyber world in which computational power (resources, services, data) is readily available like electric power. Any information at any time at any place can be made available in our fingertips. This is used in disaster management, weather forecasting, market forecasting, bio information, etc.
Advantages

  • It is used to solve more complex problems in a short time.
  • Existing hardware used efficiently
  • Scalable: The number of computers can be added according to the workload increases

Disadvantages

  • Processing speed is less
  • Different computers uses different software and the licensing issues may effect the working of application

Question 12.
Explain cluster computing with its merits.
Answer:
Cluster means groups. Here a group of Internet connected computers, storage devices, etc are linked together and work like a single computer. It provides Computational power through parallel processing. Its cost is less and used for scientific applications.
Advantages

  • Price-performance ratio: The performance is high and the cost is less.
  • Availability: If one group of system fails the other group will do the work.
  • Scalability: Computers can be easily added according to the workload increases.

Question 13.
What is cloud computing?
Answer:
It is an emerging computing technology. Herewith the use of Internet and central remote servers to maintain data and applications. Example for this is Email service, Office Software(word processor, spreadsheets, presentations, database, etc), graphics software, etc. The information is placed in a central remote server just like clouds in the sky hence the name cloud computing.

Question 14.
Explain the Turing test
Answer:
The Turing test is a test of a machine’s ability to exhibit intelligent behaviour equivalent to, or indistinguishable from, that of a human. The test involves a human judge engages in natural language conversations with a human and a machine designed to generate performance indistinguishable from that of a human being.

All participants are separated from one another. If the judge cannot reliably tell the machine from the human, the machine is said to have passed the test. The test does not check the ability to give the correct answer to questions; it checks how closely the answer resembles typical human answers. Turing predicted that by 2000 computer would pass the test.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 15.
Compare parallel and serial computing.
Answer:
The difference between these two is given below.

Serial computingParallel computing
A single processor is usedMultiple processors are used with shared memory
A problem is divided into a series of instructionsA problem is divided into smaller ones that can be solved simultaneously
Instructions executed sequentiallyInstructions executed simultaneously
One instruction is executed on a single processor at any momentMore than one instruction is executed on multiple processors at any moment of time.

Plus Two Computer Science Advances in Computing Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain the three cloud service models.
Answer:
Cloud service models (3 major services):
1. Software as a Service (SaaS):
A SaaS provider company provides more services on demand such as they allow to access both resources and applications.
Examples are Google Docs, Adobe creative cloud, Microsoft Office 365, Facebook.com, etc.

2. Platform as a Service(PaaS):
A PaaS provider company provides subscribers access to the components that they, require to develop and operate applications over the Internet.
Example: LAMP platform(Linux, Apache Server, MySQL, and PHP), ASP.NET, PHP and Python, Google’s App Engine, Microsoft Azure, Force.com, etc.

3. Infrastructure as a Service(laaS):
It provides basic storage devices and computing capabilities as standardized services over the network.
Example: Amazon Web Services, Joyent, AT&T, GoGrid, etc.

Question 2.
What are the applications of Computational Intelligence? Explain?
Answer:
Application of Computational Intelligence
A. Biometrics:
Biometrics refers to the unique characteristics of a human being to recognize an individual such as fingerprints, face recognition, iris, retina, etc. Biometrics are used to record attendance
Eg. In banks employee login is restricted by using fingerprint readers.

B. Robotics:
It is a branch of scientific study associated with the design, manufacturing and controls the movements of the robots. Robotics are used in all areas. Some of them are discussed below.

1. Uses in vehicle manufacturing industry: Robots are used to do all tasks such as welding, cutting, lifting, sorting and bending. Since it is a machine, it can operate for long hours untiringly.

2. Exploration of outer space:
Robots are very much useful in this field such as they are used to do all the tasks related to launch a satellite.

3. In intelligent homes:
Robots are used in home segments to safe guard the home, automatically open the gate, doors and windows, etc.

4. Exploration in difficult environments:
Human beings are not ready to work situations like too hot and too cold. Since it is a machine robots are used instead of human beings. Robots are used in oil filed etc.

5. Uses in military:
Unmanned air crafts and vehicles are controlled by robots. Drones and computer controlled cameras are used in Military service.

6. Uses in agriculture:
Nowadays in India, the agriculture field is also in mechanization trend. Hence increase productivity.

C. Computer vision:
The world is changed from 2 dimensional images to 3 dimensional. 3D TVs are available in the market. Multiple cameras are used to capture the images and merge them to form 3D pictures. 3D scanners are used in the Medical filed to diagnose the diseases

D. Natural Language Processing:
It deals with how computers communicate just like a human being communicate naturally. Natural languages are languages spoken by the people. To achieve this ability to communicate like a human being is a laborious task. NLP is further be classified into two, Natural Language Understanding(NLU) and Natural Language Generation(NLG).

  • NLU – The ability to understand languages like English, Malayalam, etc.
  • NLG – It is deal with creation of output, i.e. generate words and giving reply.

E. Automatic Speech Recognition(ASR):
To login some computers, laptops .tabs, smartphones, etc, and to open some gates, doors, etc you have say the password orally. The computer recognizes the speech and opens the device to them.

Such devices are working based upon NLP technology and this system is called Automatic Speech Recognition(ASR) system. To implement this system the requirements, are mica or a telephone and convert the oral instruction into written text. Examples are Apple iOS, Google, etc.

F. Optical Character Recognition(OCR) and Handwritten Character Recognition Systems. (HCR):
It is used to read text from a paper as an image and translate this image into a form that computer can manipulate. For example, if we want to enter the text contents of a book by typing using a keyboard will take more time. Instead of this by using OCR and HCR we can easily do this. OCR is expensive. HCR system reads handwritten texts and converts it into computer-readable form

G. Bioinformatics:
It is a computer technology to the management of biological information. By the help of a computer analyse the fingerprints, DNA, iris, retina, etc and identifying the concerned person.
Three goals of bioinformatics.:

  1. Organise: Huge amount of data organized to access information easily and to add new information when it is produced
  2.  Develop tools: Develop new tools to analyse data efficiently.
  3. Analysis: With thw help of these tools analyse the data and produce results.

H. Geographical Information System:
Geosynchronous satellite moves at the same Revolutions Per Minute(RPM) as that of the earth in the same direction. Thus both the earth and the satellite complete one revolution exactly in the same time and hence the relative position of the ground station with respect to the satellite never changes.

Geographic Information System(GIS) technology is developed from digital cartography and Computer-Aided Design(CAD) database management system. GIS as the name implies capturing, storing for future reference, checking and displaying data related to various positions on earth’s surface.

GIS can be applied in many areas such as soil mapping, agricultural mapping, forest mapping, e-Governance, etc. GIS is used in development planning like strategic rural and urban planning, infrastructure planning, precision agriculture planning, etc.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 3.
Explain cloud computing paradigm and its three models of services in detail.
Answer:
It is an emerging computing technology. Herewith the use of Internet and central remote servers to maintain data and applications. Example for this is Email service, Office Software (word processor, spreadsheets, presentations, database, etc), graphics software, etc. The information is placed in a central remote server just like clouds in the sky hence the name cloud computing.
Cloud service models (3 major services):
1. Software as a Service(SaaS)
A SaaS provider company provides more services on demand such as they allow to access both resources and applications.
Examples are Google Docs, Adobe creative cloud, Microsoft Office 365, Facebook.com, etc.

2. Platform as a Service(PaaS)
A PaaS provider company provides subscribers access to the components that they require to develop and operate applications over the Internet.
Example: LAMP platform(Linux, Apache Server, MySQL, and PHP), ASP.NET, PHP and Python, Google’s App Engine, Microsoft Azure, Force.com, etc.

3. Infrastructure as a Service(laaS)
It provides basic storage devices and computing capabilities as standardized services over the network.
Example: Amazon Web Services, Joyent, AT&T, GoGrid, etc.

Question 4.
List and explain any three biologically inspired algorithms/paradigms that simulate natural intelligence, which led to the development of intelligent systems.
Answer:
Computational Intelligence paradigms Computational Intelligence is the ability to make a computer to face and solve real-life problems just like a intelligent man do it. It includes Artificial Neural Networks(ANN), Evolutionary Computation(EC), Swarm Intelligence(SI) and Fuzzy Systems(FS).

A. Artificial Neural Networks (ANN):
The brain is a complex, nonlinear and parallel computer with ability to perform tasks such as recognise pattern, perception and motor control. ANN is the method of simulate biological neural systems to learn, memorise and generalize like human beings. A human brain cortex consists of 10-500 billion neurons with 60 trillion synapses(a synapse is a structure that permits a neuron to pass electrical)

B. Evolutionary Computation (EC):
It is the simulation of the natural evolution, i.e. survival of the fittest. In the surrounding, we can see that the stronger must win and others will lose. EC applied for data mining, fault diagnosis, classification, scheduling, etc.

C. Swarm Intelligence (SI):
Swarm Intelligence is the study of behaviour of colonies or groups of social animals, birds, insects, ants, etc. How they communicate and create and manage their own colonies beautifully.

D. Fuzzy Systems:
Human beings use common sense while facing a problem, just like human beings fuzzy systems can also use common sense and behave like human beings. Fuzzy systems is used to control gear transmission and raking systems, control lifts, home appliances, controlling traffic signals, etc.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 11 Advances in Computing

Question 5.
One of the recent developments in Computer Science is the use of computational intelligence in different real life applications. Briefly explain any five areas of application of computational intelligence.
Answer:
A. Biometrics:
Biometrics refers to the unique characteristics of a human being to recognize an individual such as fingerprints, face recognition, iris, retina, etc. Biometrics are used to record attendance Eg. In banks employee login is restricted by using fingerprint readers.

B. Robotics:
It is a branch of scientific study associated with the design, manufacturing and control the movements of the robots. Robotics are used in all areas.

C. Computer vision:
The world is changed from 2-dimensional images to 3 dimensional. 3D TVs are available in the market. Multiple cameras are used to capture the images and merge them to form 3D pictures. 3D scanners are used in the Medical field to diagnose the diseases

D. Natural Language Processing:
It deals with how computers communicate just like a human being communicate naturally. Natural languages are languages spoken by the people. To achieve this ability to communicate like a human being is a laborious task. NLP is further be classified into two, Natural Language Understanding (NLU) and Natural Language Generation (NLG).

  • NLU- The ability to understand the languages like English, Malayalam, etc.
  • NLG- It is deal with creation of output, i.e. generate words and giving reply.

E. Automatic Speech Recognition(ASR):
To login some computers, laptops, tabs, smartphones, etc, and to open some gates, doors, etc you have say the password orally. The computer recognizes the speech and opens the device to them. Such devices are working based upon NLP technology and this system is called Automatic Speech Recognition(ASR) system.

To implement this system the requirements are a mica or a telephone and convert the oral instruction into written text. Examples are Apple iOS, Google, etc.

F. Optical Character Recognition(OCR) and Handwritten Character Recognition Systems. (HCR):
It is used to read text from a paper as an image and translate this image into a form that computer can manipulate. For example, if we want to enter the text contents of a book by typing using a keyboard will take more time. Instead of this by using OCR and HCR we can easily do this. OCR is expensive. HCR system reads handwritten texts and converts it into computer-readable form.

G. Bioinformatics:
It is a computer technology to the management of biological information. By the help of a computer analyse the fingerprints, DNA, iris, retina, etc and identifying the concerned person.
Three goals of bioinformatics.

  1. Organise
  2. Develop tools
  3. Analysis

H. Geographical Information System:
Geosynchronous satellite moves at the same Revolutions Per Minute(RPM) as that of the earth in the same direction. Thus both the earth and the satellite complete one revolution exactly in the same time and hence the relative position of the ground station with respect to the satellite never changes.

Geographic Information System(GIS) technology is developed from digital cartography and Computer-Aided Design(CAD) database management system. GIS as the name implies capturing, storing for future reference, checking and displaying data related to various positions on earth’s surface. GIS can be applied in many areas such as soil mapping, agricultural mapping, forest mapping, e-Governance, etc.

GIS is used in development planning like strategic rural and urban planning, infrastructure planning, precision agriculture planning, etc.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Students can Download Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Plus Two Accountancy Use of Spread Sheet in Business One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which of the following options in a financial function indicates the interest for a period?
(a) FV
(b) PV
(c) N per
(d) Rate
Answer:
(b) PV

Question 2.
Which of the following arguments in a financial function represents the total number of payments?
(a) FV
(b) PV
(c) N Per
(d) Rate
Answer:
(c) N-Per

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 3.
What Category of functions is used in this formula: = PMT(C 10/12, C8, C9, 1)
(a) Logical
(b) Financial
(c) Payment
(d) Statistical
Answer:
(b) Financial

Question 4.
LibreOffice Calc is a program
(a) Word Processor
(b) Browser
(c) Spread Sheet
(d) Calculator
Answer:
(c) Spread Sheet

Question 5.
……………… is the statement prepared to show detailed salary calculation
(a) Employee Job Card
(b) Payroll
(c) Loan Repayment Schedule
(d) Worksheet Payroll
Answer:
(b) payroll

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 6.
………………… calculates the monthly installment of loan amount
(a) Loan Repayment Schedule
(b) Loan analysis sheet
(c) Loan card
(d) Payroll statement
Answer:
(a) Loan Repayment schedule

Question 7.
Depreciation is provided on
(a) Current Assets
(b) Fixed Assets
(c) Current Liabilities
(d) Long term Liabilities
Answer:
(b) Fixqd Assets

Question 8.
Depreciation =
Answer:
\(\frac{\text { cost of the asset- Scrap Value }}{\text { Life of the asset }}\)

Question 9.
……………………. is the gradual & permanent diminution in the value of assets due to wear and tear, use or abuse or efflux of time.
Answer:
Depreciation

Question 10.
Under …………… method of depreciation, the asset account will be reduced to zero.
(a) Fixed Instalment method
(b) Reducing installment
(c) Depreciation Fund Method
(d) Revaluation method
Answer:
(a) Fixed Instalment Method

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 11.
Decrease in the value of fixed assets is called ……………..
Answer:
Depreciation

Question 12.
If the cost of asset is 10000, Scrap value at the end of 10 years will be 2000, what will be the amount of annual depreciation?
Answer:
Depreciation = \(\frac{10000-2000}{10}\) i.e., 800

Question 13.
Depreciation = (Acquisition cost – ………………. ) ÷ Life time
(a) Salvage value
(b) Carriage expenses
(c) Sales price
(d) Installation charges
Answer:
(a) Salvage value

Question 14.
The ……… of an asset is the value, which is realisable at the end of its useful life
(a) Depreciation
(b) Scrap value
(c) Written down value
(d) Acquisition cost
Answer:
(b) Scrap value

Question 15.
Odd one out
(a) Basic Pay
(b) Grade Pay
(c) House Rent Allowance
(d) Provident Fund
Answer:
(d) Provident Fund (It is a deduction)

Question 16.
_________ is a statutory deduction deducted monthly towards income tax liability of an employee
Answer:
Tax Deducted at Source (TDS)

Question 17.
Gross Salary – Total Deduction = ______
Answer:
Net Salary

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 18.
In PMT function, Type is, whether payment is made at the beginning of the month, the value = ……(a)…… or at the end of the month, the value = …….(b)……
Answer:
(a) 1
(b) 0

Question 19.
Rate of Depreciation under straight line Method = ………
Answer:
\(\frac{\text { Amount of Depreciation (Yearty Depreciation) }}{\text { Total Depreciable Amount (Cost) }} \times 100\)

Question 20.
The function PMT is used to prepare …………….
(a) Pay Roll statement
(b) Depreciation statement
(c) Loan repayment statement
(d) Interest on Investment statement
Answer:
(c) Loan repayment statement

Question 21.
Match the following

AB
(1) SLN(a) Written down value method of depreciation
(2) DB(b) Monthly salary statement
(3) Salvage value(c) Fixed Instalment method of depreciation
(4) Payroll(d) Acquisition Cost – Total Depreciation

Answer:
1 → c; 2 → a; 3 → d; 4 → b

Question 22.
Which among the following is not a component of PayRoll statement
(a) Professional Tax
(b) Present Value
(c) HRA
(d) Dearness Allowance
Answer:
(b) Present Value

Plus Two Accountancy Use of Spread Sheet in Business Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are the different methods for calculating depreciation on fixed Assets?
Answer:
Methods of calculation of depreciation

  1. Straight Line Method (SLM)
  2. Written Down Value Method (WDV)

Question 2.
What commands are used to

  1. Insert a column and
  2. Delete a column in Libre Office Calc

Answer:

  1. Insert a column
  2. Delete a column

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 3.
Develop the command to calculate the Group Insurance Premium and Tax Deducted at source (TDS) by using the ‘IF’ function.

  1. Rate of GI Rs. 200/-. for BP below Rs. 10,000/- and for others Rs. 300/- assuming that BP of employee is given in cell F2
  2. TDS 10% of Gross Pay for employees having Gross Pay below Rs, 25000/- and for others 20%, assuming that the gross pay of the employee is given in cell F2.

Answer:

  1. = IF (B2 < 10000,200,300)
  2. = IF (F2 < 25000, F2*10%, F2*20%)

Question 4.
Name the two basic method of depreciation functions used in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:

  1. SLN
  2. D8

Question 5.
Why is FV taken as Zero (0) in the PMT calculation?
Answer:
At the end of the loan period, the balance amount payable will be zero assuming that the repayments are made on regular basis. Therefore the future value FV is taken as zero.

Question 6.
Write the command to calculate the State Life Insurance (SLI) Premium of an Employee using the ‘IF’ function.
The condition is:- SLI Premium Rs. 250 for basic pay below Rs. 10,000/- for others Rs.500/- (Hint: Basic pay (BP) is given the cell B3)
Answer:
IF (B3 < 10000, 250, 500)

Plus Two Accountancy Use of Spread Sheet in Business Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Give some examples for PayRoll components.
Answer:

  1. Basic Pay
  2. Dearness Allowance
  3. House Rent Allowance
  4. Provident Fund
  5. Professional Tax
  6. ESI

Question 2.
Basic Pay, Dearness Allowance, House Rent allowance, Professional Tax, Provident fund contribution are given to prepare the PayRoll statement. Give the equation to calculate Net Salary.

  • Gross salary = Basic Pay + Dearness Allowance + House Rent Allowance
  • Total Deduction = Professional Tax + Provident fund contribution
  • Net Salary = Gross Salary – Total Deduction

Answer:
Net Salary Calculation:
Step 1 – Calculate Gross salary by using the given formula.
Gross salary /Gross Pay = Basic Pay + Grade Pay + Dearness Pay+ Dearness Allowance + House Rent Allowance + Any other Earnings.

Step 2 – Calculate Total Deduction by using the following formula.
Total Deduction = Professional Tax+ Provident Fund + Tax deducted at source + Loan Recovery + Any other deductions

Step 3- Calculate net salary by the given formula.
Net Salary = Gross salary – Total Deduction

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 3.
What is the difference between WDV method and SLN method of depreciation?
Answer:
Written Down Value Method (WDV):
This method is also known as Diminishing balance method or Reducing balance method. Under this method, a fixed percentage is written off every year on the book value of the asset at the beginning of the year.

Here the amount of depreciation goes on decreasing and therefore, the book value of asset will not become zero after its working life.
Amount of depreciation = Written Down Value of asset x Rate of depreciation

Straight Line Method:
Under this method a fixed amount is deducted from the value of an asset year after year on account of depreciation and debited to profit and loss account. This method is also called Fixed Instalment method, or Original Cost method. Under this method value of asset will be reduced to zero.
Depreciation = \(\frac{\text { cost of the asset-Scrap Value }}{\text { Life of the asset }}\)

Question 4.
List down the Parameters of the function PMT
Answer:
LOAN REPAYMENT SCHEDULE:
Loan is a sum of borrowed money for a specified period at a pre-specified rate of interest. The loan is repaid through a number of periodic repayment instalments over the loan repayment period. LibreOffice Calc function PMT is used to calculate the loan repayment schedule. The parameters of the function PMT are as follows.

Parameter – Explanation

  • Rate – Interest rate
  • Nper – Total Number of payments for the loan
  • PV – Present value(Loan amount)
  • FV – Future value, which is taken a zero, is the balance at the end of the loan period
  • Type – Whether payment is made at the beginning (value = 1) or at the end (value = 0) of the period.

Question 5.
Classify the assets under computerised asset accounting.
Answer:
Assets are classified into the following categories:

  1. Goodwill
  2. Land: Freehold and leasehold
  3. Building: Factory, office & residential building
  4. Plant & Machinery
  5. Furniture and fixtures
  6. Vehicles
  7. Work in progress (Capital)
  8. Other assets

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 6.
List out common Payroll components regarding salary computation and its payment.
Answer:
Earnings:

  1. Basic pay
  2. DearnessAllowances
  3. House Rent Allowances
  4. Transport Allowances
  5. Other allowances.

Deductions:

  • Provident Fund
  • Professional Tax
  • Tax deducted at source
  • E.S.I. Premium

Question 7.
What are the common accounting applications done with the help of Libre Office Calc?
Answer:

  1. Payroll Accounting
  2. Asset Management
  3. Loan Repayment Schedule

Question 8.
Write the formula in Libre Office Calc to find the Professional Tax in cell B2 where annual income is given in cell A2. Profession Tax is 5% for income in between Rs. 100000 and Rs.200000 and 8% for income more than Rs. 2,00,000. No tax for income below Rs. 1,00,000.
Answer:
= IF(B2 > 200000, B2*8%, IF(B2>100000, B2*5%,))

Plus Two Accountancy Use of Spread Sheet in Business Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write command to calculate state life Insurance Premium (SLI) of employee using the ‘IF’ function.
Condition
Premium Rs. 350/- below Basic Pay of Rs. 25000 and for others Rs. 450/- (BP is given in cell A3)
Answer:
= IF(A3 < 25000, 350, 450)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 2.
Briefly explain the procedure of preparation of salary bill and disbursement of cash.
Answer:
Preparation of Salary Bill:
The preparation of salary bill should provide for the following:
1. Maintaining payroll related data such as Employee No., Name, attendance, Basic Pay, DA, and other allowances, deductions to be made etc.

2. Periodic Payroll Computations:
It includes the calculation of various earnings and deductions.

3. Preparation of salary statement and employee’s salary slip.

4. Generation of advice to bank:
It contains the net salary to be transferred to individual bank account of employees and other salary related statutory payments such as provident fund, tax, etc.

Question 3.
The column headings of payroll to be prepared through Libre Office Calc is given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 1

  1. Write the formula to calculate DA, HRA, Gross pay, TDS and Net pay of Jexin Jose the first employee, in the second row of the worksheet.
  2. Give the command to fill the calculation automatically for the remaining ‘10’ employees in the firm.

Answer:
1. DA → C2 =B2 * 20%
HRA → D2 = B2 * 5%
GP → E2 = B2 + C2+ D2
TDS → F2 = E2 * 10%
NP → G2 = E2 – F2

2. Fill the calculation for the remaining ‘10’ employees in the firm.

Question 4.
Distinguish between straight line method and diminishing balance method of depreciation
Answer:

Straight line MethodDiminishing balance Method
1. A Fixed amount is deducted from the value of an asset.1. The amount of depreciation goes on reducing year after year.
2. Depreciation is computed on the original cost of the asset.2. Depreciation is calculated on the written down value of the asset.
3. The value of the asset is reduced to zero at the end of effective working life.3. The value of the asset will not become zero after its effective working life.
4. The method is also known as Fixed Instalment method or original cost method.4. This method is also known as reducing balance method or written down value method.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 5.
Mr. Jyothis, a Plus two commerce student, entered the following details in a worksheet of LibreOffice Calc.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 2
Write the command to calculate Net Salary
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 3
Fill down the calculation to remaining 4 employees

Question 6.
Develop the commands to calculate the group insurance premium (Gl) and Tax Deducted at source (TDS) by using the ‘IF’ function.

  1. Rate of GI Rs. 200/- for BP below Rs: 8000/- and for others Rs. 300/-, assuming that BP of employee is given in B2.
  2. TDS 10% of Gross pay, for employees having Gross pay below Rs. 15,000/- and for others, 20%, assuming that the gross pay of the employee is given in F2.

Answer:

  1. IF (B2 < 8000, 200, 300)
  2. IF (F2 < 15000, F2*10%, F2*20%)

Plus Two Accountancy Use of Spread Sheet in Business Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How the assets are classified in computerised Asset Accounting? What are the different methods of calculating depreciation on such assets?
Answer:
In computerised Asset Accounting, Assets are classified into the following categories.

  1. Goodwill
  2. Land (Normally, depreciation is not provided on freehold land)
  3. Building
  4. Plant and Machinery
  5. Furniture and Fixtures
  6. Vehicles
  7. Work in progress (Capital)
  8. Others

The different methods of calculating depreciation are:

  • Straight Line Method (SLM)
  • Written Down Value Method (WDV)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 2.
Which built in function of LibreOffice Calc can be used to compute monthly instalments of repayment of loan? Give the parameters of this function.
Answer:
PMT function can be used to prepare Loan Repayment Schedule in LibreOffice Calc.
The parameters of PMT function are:-

Parameter – Explanation

  • Rate – Interest on Loan
  • Nper – Number of payments for the loan
  • PV – Present value; (ie the loan amount)
  • FV – Future value, which is taken a zero
  • Type – If the payment is made at the beginning of the month, the value = 1 or at the end of the month, the value = 0

Question 3.
From the following particulars prepare a payroll of employees of a firm by using LibreOffice Calc

  • DA – 40% of basic pay
  • HRA – 8% of basic pay
  • Contribution to PF – 10% of basic pay.

Answer:

  • DA = Basic pay *40%
  • HRA = Basic pay *8%
  • PF = Basic pay *10%
  • Gross Pay = Basic Pay + DA + HRA
  • Net Pay = Gross pay – PF

Question 4.
From the following particulars, prepare a payroll of employees of a firm by using LibreOffice Calc.

  • DA = 70% of Basic pay
  • HRA = 10% of Basic pay
  • Contributions to PF at 15% of Basic pay.

Answer:
Step 1 – Enter the following

CellContent
A1Name of employee
B1Basic pay
C1DA
D1HRA
E1GROSS SALARY
F1PF
G1Net Salary

Step 2

CellFormula
C2= B1 * 70%
D2= B1 * 10%
E2= B2 + C2 + D2
F2= B1 * 15%
G2= E2 – F2

Step 3 – Copy this formula to the remaining cells

Plus Two Accountancy Use of Spread Sheet in Business Practical Lab Work Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Prepare a Pay Roll statement of Viswanath Enterprises from the table given below and additional information.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 4

  1. DA is provided at 90% of Basic Pay
  2. HRA: Rs. 500 for manager, 400 for accountant and 200 for others.
  3. PF is deducted @ 20% on Basic + DA

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following text/formula in respective cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 5
Step 3 – Enter the given details

CellFormula
E2= D2 * 90%
F2= IF(C2 = “Manager”, 500, IF(C2 = “Accountant”, 400, 200))
G2= SUM (D2: F2)
H2= SUM(D2: E2) * 20%
K2= SUM(H2: J2)
L2= G2 – K2

Step 4 – Copy the formula down up to the last employee.
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 6

Question 2.
Mr. Shibu wants to take a housing loan of Rs. 2,00,000 repayable in 60 equal monthly installments over the next 5 years. Assuming that the installments are paid in the beginning of each month. Find out the amount of monthly installments. Use PMT Function.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open blank work sheet in LibreOffice Calc.
Applications → Office → Libre Office Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following data in appropriate cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 7
Output:

Monthly Installments-4,404.84

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 3.
Riya took a industrial loan of Rs. 300000, repayable in 4 years (equal monthly installments). The annual rate of interest is 10%. Assuming that the installments are paid at the end of each month. Find out the amount of monthly installments. Use PMT Function.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank work sheet in LibreOffice Calc.
Application → Office → Libre Office Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following data in appropriate cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 8
Output:

Monthly Installments-7608.78

Question 4.
From the following particulars of employees in Anu Traders, prepare the Pay Roll.

NameBasic pay
Thomson8760
Nilson9340
Shibu10100
Shijo7690
Shyjan8350
Rejo11200

Additional information:

  1. DA – 50% of BP
  2. HRA – 10% of BP
  3. A monthly subscription to PF – 15% of BP
  4. Group insurance premium -120 from each employee.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 9

Step 3 – Enter the following details in the respective cells

CellFormula
C3= B3 * 50%
D3= B3 * 10%
E3= SUM(B3: D3)
F3= B3 * 15%
H3= F3 + G3
13= E3 – H3

Step 4 – Copy the formula down up to the last employee.
Output:

NameNet Salary
Thomson12582
Nilson13423
Shibu14525
Shijo11030.50
Shyjan11987.50
Rejo16120

Question 5.
The salary information of a company named Seasons India Ltd. is given below. Prepare Payroll.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 10
DA – 50% of Basic pay, CCA – 5% of Basic pay, PF 8% of Basic pay.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 11
Step 3 – Enter the following formula in respective cells

CellFormula
C2= B3 * 50%
E2= B3 * 5%
F2= SUM(B3: E3)
G2= B3 * 8%
H2= F3 – G3

Step 4 – Copy the formula down up to the last employee
Output:

Name of EmployeeNet Salary
Adarsh12760
Alwin Paul12613
Amal Mohan12760
Amarnath12098.50
Anurag14230

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 6.
Mr.Anil Kumar a plus two commerce student entered the following details in a worksheet of LibreOffice Calc.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 12
But, he faces some difficulty in completing the task. Can you help him by giving necessary commands or formula for filling the bank columns in the given spread sheet.
Answer:
Give the Following Formula:

CellFormula
C3= B3 * 15%
D3= B3 * 5%
E3= B3 * 2%
F3= B3 + C3 + D3 + E3
G3= B3 * 10%
H3= F3 – G3

Copy these formula to the remaining cell. Edit – Fill – Down or use Drag option.
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 13

Question 7.
Prepare the payroll of Amal Bros, for the month of January 2016.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 14

  • DA – 36% of Basic Pay
  • HRA – Rs 500
  • CCA – 6% of Basic pay

Deduction:

  1. PF subscription – 8% of BP.
  2. Group insurance premium Rs. 200 below basic pay Rs. 6000 and for others Rs. 350.
  3. Tax deducted at source 10% of Gross Pay for employees below gross pay of Rs. 10000 arid for others 20%. Also, find out the total salary payable to employees for the month.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank work sheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 15

Step 3 – Enter the following formula in the respective cell

CellFormula
C2= B2 * 36%
E2= B2 * 6%
F2= SUM(B2: E2)
G2= B2 * 8%
12= IF(B2 < 6000, 200, 350)
J2= IF(F2 < 10000, F2 * 10%, F2 * 20%)
K2= SUM(G2: J2)
L2= F2 – K2

Step 4 – Copy the formula down up to the last employee.
Output:

Name of EmployeeNet Salary
Jaizal Grace7134
Haizal Rose7218.80
Joshwin Zian6688
Anlino Zinan6359.80

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 8.
Prepare a pay roll of Jayakumar Associates for the month of June 2016 from the following details
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 16
Additional Information’s

  1. DA – 50% of Basic pay earned
  2. HRA – Manager – 30%, Accountant – 20%, clerk 10%, no HRA for saleswoman/Salesman and driver.
  3. Transport allowance – 1500 for saleswoman, 2500 for salesman and 1000 for driver
  4. PF contribution – 6% of BP for all employees except the driver.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following text/formula in the following way
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 17
Step 3 – Enter the given formula in F2
F2 = 30 – E2
Copy the formula down to the last employee

Step 4 – Enter the given formula in G2
G2 = D2*F2 ÷ 30
Copy the formula down to the last employee.

Step 5 – Enter the text for formula in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 18
Step 6 – Copy the formula down to the last employee.
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 19
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 20

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 9.
Megha Associates purchased a new Machinery on 1/1/2010 for Rs. 8000 and spent Rs. 2000 for its installation. The expected salvage value is Rs. 2000 at the end of its useful life of 10 years. Calculate the amount of depreciation under straight line method.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details as follows
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 21
Output:

Depreciation1800

Question 10.
On 1.1.2010, Vahida Enterprises purchased a new machinery for Rs. 150000 and incurred Rs. 10000 for its installation. Preoperative expense amounted to Rs. 5000. The expected salvage value at the end of its useful life of 8 years is Rs. 2000. Calculate depreciation by straight line method by using spread sheet.
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 22
Output:

Depreciation20375

Question 11.
On 1st April 2000, a company purchased a Machinery for Rs. 20,00,000, The installation charge is 50,000, pre-operation expenses are 1,50,000 and its salvage value is calculated Rs. 1, 00,000. Life of machinery is estimated to 15 years. Calculate depreciation under straight line method.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following data/formula in the following way.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 23
Output:

Depreciation1,40,000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 12.
From the following details, calculate depreciation under written down value method by using spread sheet.

  1. Purchase fo Machinery – 10-6-2012
  2. Cost of the Machinery – 300000
  3. Machinery installed on – 15-6-2012
  4. Installation Expenses – 2000
  5. Pre operating cost – 13000
  6. Salvage value after 8 years – 18000
  7. 1st year end date – 31/3/2013

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the given data/ formula as follows.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 24
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 25
Output:

Depreciation79012.50

Question 13.
From the following details, calculate depreciation of machinery under written down value method using spreadsheet.

Name of assetMachinery
Date of purchase10-5-2009
Date of installation20-5-2009
Purchase cost200000
Installation cost30000
Pre operating cost20000
Salvage value10,000
Expected life of asset8 years
1st year end date31/3/2010

Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the given data in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 26
Output:

Depreciation75854.17

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 14.
From the following details, calculate depreciation underwritten down value Method.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 27
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following data in the respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 28
Output:

Depreciation – Filling Machine2,31,882.75
Depreciation – Packing Machine31,205.63

Question 15.
On 1-2-2015, Vikram borrowed Rs. 6,00,000 from Canara bank at 9.6% interest. The period of loan is 36 months. Calculate monthly installment assuming the installments are made at the beginning of each month.
procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter data/formula as follows:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 29
Output:

Monthly Loan installment54567.32

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application

Question 16.
Mr. Chandramohan has taken a loan of Rs. 300,000 from a bank at an interest rate of 10% p.a. The loan is to be repaid in 36 monthly installments over the next 3 years. Assuming that the monthly installments are paid at the end of each month. Calculate the amount of interest paid by him in the 2nd year only. Use CUMIPMT Function.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details and formula in different cells as given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Use of Spread Sheet in Business Application - 30
Output:

Interest for the 2nd year16491.63

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Server Side Scripting Using PHP

Students can Download Chapter 10 Server Side Scripting Using PHP Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Server Side Scripting Using PHP

Plus Two Computer Science Server Side Scripting Using PHP One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
PHP files have a default file extension of ______.
(a) .html
(b) .xml
(c) .php
(d) .ph
Answer:
(c) .php

Question 2.
A PHP script should start with.
(a) <php>
(b) <?php?>
(c) <?php>
(d) <?php?>
Answer:
(c) <?php>

Question 3.
We can use_ to provide multi line comments.
(a) /?
(b) //
(c) #
(d) /* */
Answer:
(d) /* */

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Server Side Scripting Using PHP

Question 4.
Which of the following php statement/statements will store 111 in variable num?
i) int$num = 111;
ii) intnum = 111;
iii) $num = 111;
iv) 111 = $num;
(a) Both i) and ii)
(b) All of the mentioned.
(c) Only iii)
(d) Only i)
Answer:
(c) Only iii)

Question 5.
What will be the output of the following PHP code?
<?php
$num = 1;
$num1 = 2;.
print $num . “+”. $num1;
?>
(a) 3
(b) 1 + 2
(c) 1. + .2
(d) Error
Answer:
(b) 1 + 2

Question 6.
Which of the following PHP statements will output Hello World on the screen?
i) echo (“Hello World”);
ii) print (“Hello World”);
iii) cout(“Hello World”);
iv) sprintf (“Hello World”);
(a) i) and ii)
(b) i), ii) and iii)
(c) All of the mentioned.
(d) i), ii) and iv)
Answer:
(a) i) and ii)

Question 7.
What will be the output of the following PHP code?
<?php
$total=25;
$more=10;
$total=$total + $more; .
echo “$total”;
?>
(a) Error
(b) 35 students
(c) 35
(d) 25 students
Answer:
(c) 35

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Server Side Scripting Using PHP

Question 8.
Which statement will output $x on the screen?
(a) echo “\$x”;
(b) echo “$$x”;
(c) echo“/$x”;
(d) echo“$x;”;
Answer:
(a) echo “\$x”;

Question 9.
What will be the output of the following PHP code?
<?php
$a = “clue”;
$a = “get”;
echo “$a”;
?>
(a) get
(b) true
(c) false
(d) clueget
Answer:
(d) clueget

Question 10.
PHP’s numerically indexed array begin with position ______.
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 0
(d) -1
Answer:
(c) 0

Question 11.
What will be the output of the following PHP code?
<?php
echo $x— != ++$x;
?>
(a) 1
(b) 0
(c) error
(d) no output
Answer:
(d) no output

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Server Side Scripting Using PHP

Question 12.
List Superglobals used in PHP.
Answer:
superglobals used in PHP is given below.
$_REQUEST, S_POST, S_GET, and S_COOKIE.

Plus Two Computer Science Server Side Scripting Using PHP Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the PHP functions we use

  1. to find the length of a string
  2. for comparing two strings

Answer:

  1. strlen()
  2. strcmp()

Question 2.
What is the main difference between JavaScript and PHP?
Answer:
JavaScript is a client side scripting language whereas PHP is a server side scripting language.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Server Side Scripting Using PHP

Question 3.
What will be the output of the following PHP code?
<?php
$a = 10;
echo ++$a;
echo $a++;
echo $a;
echo ++$a;
?>
(a) 11111213
(b) 11121213
(c) 11111212
(d) 11111112
Answer:
(a) 11111213
It works as follows
<?php
$a = 10;
echo ++$a; → Here pre increment first add 1 to
10 then it prints 11
echo $a++; → Here it prints 11 and then add 1 to
11 and stores in the variable $a, i.e. $a=12. echo$a; → Here it prints 12.
echo ++$a; → Here pre increment first add 1 to
12 then it prints 13 ?>

Question 4.
What will be the output of the following PHP code?
<?php
$x=”test”;
$y=”this”;
$z=”also”;
$x.=$y.=$z; echo $x; echo $y;
?>
(a) testthisthisalso
(b) testthis
(c) testthisalsothisalso
(d) error at line 4
Answer:
(c) testthisalsothisalso

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Server Side Scripting Using PHP

Question 5.
What will be the output of the following PHP code?
<?php
$y = 2;
if ($y— == ++$y)
{
echo $y;
}
?>
(a) 2
(b) 1
(c) 3
(d) no output
Answer:
(a) 2
It works as follows $y=2;
Here $y – – (LHS of the condition) , it first use the value of $y i.e. 2 hence LHS becomes 2, then its values decremented by 1 so $y now becomes 1. ++$y(RHS of the condition) first it changes the value
i. e. incremented by 1 now $y=2 hence RHS becomes 2
Here LHS and RHS are same then the condition $y— == ++$y returns true.
So it prints the value of $y, i.e. 2.

Plus Two Computer Science Server Side Scripting Using PHP Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A special type of array which is not supported by C++ is used in PHP. Can you describe the features of that array with example?
Answer:
Associative arrays
Arrays with named keys and string indices are called associative arrays.
Syntax: $varibale_name=array(key1 =>value1, key2=>value2,etc);
Eg:
<!DOCTYPE HTML>
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<title>
We are learning PHP </title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=”cyan”>
<?php
$course = array (“Computer Science”=>”05″, “Commerce”=>”39″,”Science”=> “01” ); echo”The code of Computer Science is “.Scourse[“Computer Science”];
?>
</body>
</html>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Server Side Scripting Using PHP

Question 2.
Compare echo and print statements used in PHP.
Answer:
Output statements in PHP:
1. echo and print are used to display all types of data but echo is used to produce multiple outputs. Parenthesis is optional. Print returns true or false based on success or failure whereas echo doesn’t return true or false.
eg:
echo “ first output”, “second output”; or
echo (“ first output”, “second output”);
print “only one output”; .
or
print (“only one output”);
Eg.
<!DOCTYPE HTML> <head> <meta charset=”UTF-8″> <title>
This is a php page </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
echo “This is first output”,” This is second output<br>”;
print “Only support single output”;
?>
</body>
</html>

Question 3.
List the main differences between GET and POST methods in form submitting?
Answer:
The main differences are given below.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 10 Server Side Scripting Using PHP img1

Plus Two Computer Science Server Side Scripting Using PHP Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are the additional steps involved to run PHP in your computer?
Answer:
Basics of PHP
A. Setting up the development environment

  • Step 1: Install a PHP compatible web Server(Eg. Abyss Web Server For Windows)
  • Step 2: Install PHP interpreter.
    After installing the webserver type http:// localhost in the address bar the following screen will be available.

B. Writing and running the script
Take a note pad and type the code , PHP code should begin with <?php and end with ?>. Save this file in the root directory of the web server with extension .php.
Step 1
Take a notepad and type the following and save it as first.php on C:\Abyss Web Server\htdocs.
<?php
echo” My first PHP web page”;
?>
Step 2
Start the webserver if it is off
Step 3
Type as “http://localhost/first.php” in the address bar.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Students can Download Chapter 9 Structured Query Language Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Plus Two Computer Science Structured Query Language One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
………………. form of SQL is designed for use within general purpose programming languages such as COBOL, C, etc.
Answer:
Embedded SQL.

Question 2.
What is TCL?
Answer:
Transaction Control Language- component of SQL includes commands for specifying transactions.

Question 3.
Data dictionary is a special file in DBMS. What is it used for?
Answer:
Table details are stored in this file.

Question 4.
What does the following statement mean?
Name VARCHAR(30)
Answer:
Field Name can store up to 30 characters. It is a column definition.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 5.
Is there any data type available in SQL to store your date of birth information?
Answer:
Yes. DATE data type

Question 6.
Pick the odd one out.
(DEC, NUMBER, INT, DATE)
Answer:
DATE.

Question 7.
How do you ensure that the field ‘name’ will have some value always?
Answer:
using the constraint NOT NULL.

Question 8.
How to set the default value of column District in a table to Thrissur?
Answer:
District VARCHAR(30) DEFAULT ‘Thrissur’

Question 9.
…………… symbol is used as substitution operator in SQL.
Answer:
&

Question 10.
Is there any method to find the strings starting with letter ‘a’ from a field in SQL?
Answer:
Use LIKE operator, LIKE ‘a%’

Question 11.
How to check whether a particular field contains null values or not?
Answer:
Use operator IS NULL

Question 12.
‘ORDER BY’ clause is used for …………
Answer:
Sorting the results of a query by ascending(Asc) or Descending (Desc)

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 13.
The built-in functions in SQL that return just a single value for a group of rows in a table are called ………..
Answer:
Summary functions or aggregate functions

Question 14.
How to find the number of values in a column in the table?
Answer:
Using the function COUNT()

Question 15.
………………. is the clause in SQL used for categorization.
Answer:
GROUP BY

Question 16.
Thomas wants to remove a table that he were using. How could you help him doing this?
Answer:
Using DROP TABLE command.

Question 17.
Pick the odd one out.
(SELECT, UPDATE, DELETE, DROP TABLE)
Answer:
DROP TABLE

Question 18.
Name the aggregate function that can be used to find the total number of records.
Answer:
COUNT()

Question 19.
Which of the following is an essential clause used with SELECT command?
(GROUP BY, ORDER BY, WHERE, FROM)
Answer:
FROM

Question 20.
Which of the following is not a column constraint?
(CHECK, DISTINCT, UNIQUE, DEFAULT)
Answer:
DISTINCT

Question 21.
Which of the following is a DDL command?
(SELECT, UPDATE, CREATE TABLE, INSERT INTO)
Answer:
CREATE TABLE

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 22.
What are the logical operators used in SQL?
Answer:
And, Or, Not.

Question 23.
The …………. operator pf SQL is used to match a pattern with the help of %. February 2009
(a) BETWEEN
(b) AND
(c) LIKE
(d) OR
Answer:
(c) LIKE

Question 24.
The structure of a table Book is given below.

BookNoInteger
TitleVarchar (200)
AuthorVarchar(100)
PriceDec{5, 2)

Write SQL query to Insert an additional column Purchase date of date type to the Books table.
Answer:
Alter table Book add(PurchaseDate Date);

Question 25.
Suppose we want to include a column in a table in which serial numbers are to be stored automatically on adding new records. Which constraint is to be used for that column during table creation?
Answer:
The constraint Autojncrement is used.

Question 26.
Which of the following cannot be used to name a table in SQL? Give the reason.
Answer:
(a) Studnt50
(b) Table
(c) $Employee
(d) Stock_123
Answer:
(b) Table. This is a keyword hence it cannot be used.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 27.
Which of the following commands is used to view the structure of a table?
(a) SHOW TABLES
(b) DESC
(C) SELECT
(d) DISPLAY
Answer:
(b) DESC

Question 28.
The command to eliminate the table CUSTOMER from a database is:
(a) REMOVE TABLE CUSTOMER
(b) DROP TABLE CUSTOMER
(c) DELETE TABLE CUSTOMER
(d) UPDATE TABLE CUSTOMER
Answer:
(b) DROP TABLE CUSTOMER

Question 29.
Which SQL command is used to open a database?
(a) OPEN
(b) SHOW
(c) USE
(d) CREATE
Answer:
(c) USE

Question 30.
Which is the keyword used with SELECT command to avoid duplication of rows in the selection?
Answer:
DISTINCT

Question 31.
Pick odd one out and write reason:
(a) WHERE
(b) ORDER BY
(c) UPDATE
(d) GROUP BY
Answer:
UPDATE. It is a command and others are clauses.

Question 32.
Which of the following clause is not used with SELECT command in SQL?
(a) GROUP BY
(b) WHERE
(c) SET
(d) ORDER BY
Answer:
(c) SET. This clause is used with UPDATE.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 33.
……………… operator in SQL is used with wild card characters for selection of records.
(a) LIKE
(b) IN
(c) NOT IN
(d) IN and NOT IN
Answer:
(a) LIKE

Plus Two Computer Science Structured Query Language Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How is SQL different from other computer high-level languages?
Answer:
SQL means Structured Query Language. It is a relational database language, not a programming language like other high-level languages. It provides facilities to create a table, insert data into a table, retrieve information from a table, modify data in the table, etc.

Question 2.
Distinguish the SQL keywords UNIQUE and DISTINCT.
Answer:
1. Unique – It ensures that no two rows have the same value in a column while storing data. It is used with create command.

2. Distinct – This keyword is used to avoid duplicate values in a column of a table while retrieving data. It is used with select command.

Question 3.
Identify errors in the following SQL statement and rewrite it correctly. Underline the corrections.
CREATE student TABLE (admno PRIMARY KEY, roll no INT, name CHAR);
Answer:
The correct SQL statement is as follows.
CREATE TABLE student( admno INT PRIMARY KEY, roll_no INT, name CHAR(3));

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 4.
Suppose a column named Fee does not contain any value for some records in the table named STUDENT. Write SQL statements to fill these blanks with 1000.
Answer:
UPDATE STUDENT SET Fee = 1000 WHERE Fee IS NULL;

Question 5.
Identify the errors in the following SQL statement and give reason for the error.
SELECT FROM STUDENT ORDER BY Group WHERE Marks above 50;
Answer:
In this query Group is the keyword hence it cannot be used. The correct query is as follows.
SELECT * FROM STUDENT WHERE Marks > 50 ORDER BY Marks;

Question 6.
Differentiate CHAR and VARCHAR data types of SQL.
Answer:

  1. Char – It is used to store fixed number of characters. It is declared as char(size).
  2. Varchar – It is used to store characters but it uses only enough memory.

Question 7.
Assume that CUSTOMER is a table with columns Cust_code, Cust_name, Mob_No and Email. Write an SQL statement to add the details of a customer who has no e-mail id.
Answer:
INSERT INTO CUSTOMER VALUES(1001, ‘ALVIS’, 9447024365, NULL);

Question 8.
Find the correct clause from the 2nd column for each SQL command in the 1st column.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language img1
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language img2

Question 9.
Is ALL a keyword in SQL? Explain
Answer:
Yes, ALL retains all the duplicate values of a field

Question 10.
Differentiate LIKE ‘a%’ and LiKE ‘a_’
Answer:
%, it replaces a string but _ replaces only one character at a time.LIKE ‘a%’ retrieve all strings of any length that start with letter ‘a’ while LIKE ‘a_’ retrieve all two letter strings that start with letter ‘a’.

Question 11.
Is multiple sorting possible using ORDER BY clause? Explain
Answer:
Yes, by giving multiple field names separated by comma in the ORDER BY clause.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 12.
While inserting records into a table, Raju finds it is not possible to give more than 20 characters in the ‘name’ field. How can you help Raju solve this problem?
Answer:
Using ALTER TABLE command he can modify the width of field so that it can accommodate more than 20 characters.

Question 13.
After executing a query Mohan gets a message like ‘Table Altered’. What would have he done? Give the syntax.
Answer:
He would have used the ALTER TABLE command.
Syntax: ALTER TABLE ADD/MODIFY ();

Question 14.
During discussion one student said that DELETE and DROP TABLE commands are same. Do you agree with that? Justify.
Answer:
No, DROP TABLE removes a table entirely from the database whereas DELETE command deletes only records from an existing table.

Question 15.
1. Pick odd one out.
DROP TABLE, DELETE, ALTER TABLE, CREATE VIEW
2. Justify your answer
Answer:

  1. DELETE
  2. All others are DDL commands

Question 16.

  1. Pick odd one out from the following.
  2. Justify your answer.

Answer:

  1. Group By
  2. Group By is not a Constraint.

Question 17.
Consider the following SQL statements.
DELETE Name.
From Student
Where name = ‘Raju”
Find the error in the SQL if any and correct it.
Answer:
Delete from student where name = ‘Raju’

Question 18.
Consider the following Query in SQL.
From Employee Where branch = ‘Kannur’ Group By Department Having avg (salary) > 7000, Compare the ‘where’ clause and ‘Having’ Clause using the above query.
Answer:
‘where’ clause applies on single rows but Having clause applies on a group.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 19.
Some constraints in SQL are called column constraints. Some constraints are called table constraints. How do they differ?
Answer:
Column constraints are specified while defining each column, table constraints are specified once for the entire table at the end of table definition

Question 20.
1. Choose the odd one from the following.
Primary key, Unique, Distinct, Default, Check
2. Justify your choice
Answer:

  1. Distinct
  2. Distinct is used with select command while others are column constraints of create table command.

Question 21.
Name the most appropriate SQL data type required to store the following data.

  1. Name of a student
  2. Date of Birth of a student.
  3. RollNo. of a student (in the range 1 to 50)
  4. Percentage of marks obtained

Answer:

  1. Varchar(70)
  2. Date
  3. Smallint OR Integer Or decimal
  4. Dec(5, 2)

Question 22.
1. From the list given below select the names that cannot be used as a table name.
Adm_No, Date, Salary2006, Table, Column_Name, Address.
2. Justify your selection.
Answer:

  1. Date, Table
  2. There is a data type Date and Table is a keyword used to create a table. So these two are not used.

Question 23.
Classify the following SQL elements into two and give proper title for each category.
NOT NULL, AVG, COUNT, CHECK, SUM, DEFAULT
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language img3

Plus Two Computer Science Structured Query Language Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
As a part of your school project, you are asked to create a table Student with the fields RollNo, Name, Date of Birth and Score in IT. The constraints required are RollNo. is the primary key. Name cannot be empty.
Answer:
Create table student(RollNo decimal(2) not null primary key, Name varchar(20) not null, DOB date, Score number(2));

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 2.
A table Employee consists of fields EmployeeNo, Name, Designation and Salary.
Consider that you are forced to give access to this table for an engineer from another company. But for security reasons you need to hide Salary from him. Employee No, Name, Designation, Salary.

  1. Name the concept that provides this engineer, a facility to work on this table without viewing salary. Salary view
  2. Write SQL query for implementing this SQL query

Answer:

  1. Views
  2. Create view Empview as select employeeno, Name, Designation from Employee.

Question 3.
Explain the keywords in the following query.
Answer:
SELECT allows to retrieve a subset of rows from the table, DISTINCT avoids duplication of courses from the table STUDENT, FROM is a keyword used to specify the name of the table

Question 4.
A table named student is given below.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language img4
Write answers for the questions based on the above table.

  1. SQL statement to display the different courses available without duplication.
  2. SQL statement to display the Name and Batch of the students whose percentage has a null value.
  3. Output of the query select count (percentage) from Student.

Answer:

  1. Select distinct batch from Student;
  2. Select name, batch from Student where percent is null
  3. 5

Question 5.
Once the creation of a table is over, one can perform two changes in the schema of the table. What are they? Give syntax.
Answer:
We can alter the table in two ways.
1. We can add a new column to the existing table using the following
syntax: ALTER TABLE ADD( );

2. We can also change or modify the existing column in terms of type or size using the following
syntax: ALTER TABLEMODIFY( );

Question 6.
Explain how pattern matching can be done in SQL with an example.
Answer:
pattern matching can be done using the operator LIKE while setting the condition with pattern matching. for eg., to display the names of all students whose name begins with letters ‘ma’, we can write the following query, SELECT name FROM STUDENT WHERE name LIKE ‘ma%’; here the character ‘%’ – substitutes any number of characters in the value of the specified column. Another character substitutes only one character of the specified column.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 7.
During the discussion of study your friend say that table and view are the same. How can you correct him?
Answer:
Tables and views are different. A view is a single virtual table that is derived from other physically existing tables. When we access a view we actually access the base tables.

We can use all the DML commands with the views but care should be taken as operation actually reflects in the base tables. The advantage of view is that without sparing extra storage space, we can use same table as different virtual tables. It also implements sharing along with privacy.

Question 8.
Find the errors if any of the following code.
Create table emp (name char, RolINo int(20));
Answer:
Here the argument size of data type char of field name is missing. So we can store a character only. The second error is the data type int has no argument. The correct statement is as follows Create table emp (name char(20), RolINo int);

Question 9.
Consider the following variable Declaration in SQL.
a. name char (25)
b. name Varchar (25)

  1. Considering the utilisation of memory, which variable declaration is more suitable.
  2. Justify your answer

Answer:
1. name varchar (25)
2. Because char data type is fixed length. It allocates maximum memory i.e, here it allocates memory for 25 characters maybe there is a chance of memory wastage. But Varchar allocates only enough memory to store the actual size.

Question 10.
Mr. Dilip wants to construct a table and implement some restrictions on the table.

  1. Column can never have empty values.
  2. One of the columns must be a key to identify the rows etc.

Can you help him to create that table satisfying the above restrictions with an example
Answer:

  1. Use of create table, Not NULL.
  2. Primary key Eg: Create table employee(RollNo decimal(3) not null primary key,Name Varchar(70) not null, Design Varchar(30), DOB Date,Salary Dec(7,2));

Question 11.
Write SQL query to construct a table student with fields Reg No, Stud Name, Sex, Course, grade, etc. As per the following conditions

  1. Reg No should not be empty and using this column any rows in that table can be identified. Reg. No.
  2. Student name should have some value.
  3. Default value of sex be Female.
  4. Grade should be any of the values: A+, A, B+, B, C+, C, D+, D, E

Answer:
Create table Student(RollNo decimal(3) not null primary key, Name Varchar(70) not null, sex char default ‘Female’,Grade char(2));

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 12.
Ramu create Table employee with fields empId, empname, Designation, salary using SQL statements. Later he found that data type of emPId is typed as Integer instead of character and missed a field ‘Department’. Can you help him to solve this problem without recreating ‘employee’ table?
Answer:
Alter Table Employee Modify(Empld char(4)); AlterTable Employee Add(Dept char(15));

Question 13.
While creating a table Alvis give “Emp Details” for table name. Is it Possible? Write down the rules for naming a Table.
Answer:
It is not possible because there is a space between Emp and Details. The rules are given below:

  1. It must not be a keyword(Keywords are reserved words and have predefined meaning)
  2. It must begin with alphabets
  3. Digits can be used followed by alphabets
  4. Special characters cannot be used except underscore
  5. We cannot give the name of another table

Plus Two Computer Science Structured Query Language Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider the table ITEMS.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language img5
a) SELECT ITEMCODE, NAME FROM ITEMS WHERE CATEGORY = ‘Stationery’;
b) SELECT * FROM ITEMS WHERE SALES_ PRICE < UNIT_PRICE;
c) SELECT CATEGORY, COUNT(*) FROM ITEMS GROUP BY CATEGORY;
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language img6

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 2.
Write SQL queries to SQL Query to
1. Create a table Employee with the fields given below.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language img7
2. List the name of all employees whose name’s second letter is ‘a’.
3. List the Name and Designation of employees whose Designation is not ‘Manager’
4. Increase the salary of ail employees by 10 percent.
5. Remove all managers whose salary is less than Rs. 10,000 from the table.
Answer:

  1. Create table employee(Name Varchar(70), Desgn Varchar(30), DOB Date, Salary Dec(7,2));
  2. Select Name from Employee where Name like
  3. Select Name, Desgn from Employee where Desg no’Manager’;
  4. Update Employee set Salary = Salary + Salary * .01;
  5. Delete from Employee where Desgn = ‘Manager’ and Salary < 10000;

Question 3.
A table Student consists of fields Roll No, Name, Batch and Percent. Write SQL statements to

  1. Display RolINo and Name of students whose percentage is Iessthan90 and greater than 70.
  2. Display RolINo and Name of all students in science batch whose percentage is more than 90.
  3. Display Names of all students in commerce and science batches.
  4. Display the average Percent of students in each batch.
  5. Display RolINo and Name in the ascending order of Batch and descending order of Percent.

Answer:

  1. Select RollNo, Name from Student where percent < 90 and percent > 70;
  2. Select RollNo, Name from Student where Batch = ’Science’ and percent > 90;
  3. Select Name from Student where batch = ’Science’ Or ’batchCommerce’;
  4. Select batch, Avg(percent) from Student group by batch;
  5. Select RollNo, Name from Student order by batch, percent desc;

Question 4.
1. Classify the following SQL commands.
Create table, Insert Into, AlterTable, Delete, Up-date, Drop Table, Select.
2. List the features of each category.
Answer:
1. DDL – Create Table, Alter Table, Drop Table.
DML- Insert Into, Delete, Update, Select.

2. DDL – DDL means Data Definition Language. It is used to create the structure of a table, modify the structure of a table and delete the structure of a table. DML -DML means Data Manipulation Language. It is used to insert records into a table, modify the records of a table, delete the records of a table and retrieve the records from a table.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 5.
Explain the available database integrity constraints.
Answer:
1. NOT NULL: it specifies that a column can never have null values, i.e., not empty

2. UNIQUE: it ensures that no two rows have same value in the specified column.

3. PRIMARY KEY: it declares a column or a set of columns as the primary key of the table. This constraint makes a column NOT NULL and UNIQUE.

4. DEFAULT: it sets a default value for a column when the user does not enter a value for that column.

5. Auto_increment: This constraint is used to perform auto increment the values in a column. That automatically generates serial numbers. Only one auto-increment column per table is allowed.

Question 6.
Consider a table student with fields Reg No, Stud Name, Sex, Course, total score.
Write SQL queries for the following:
RegNo, Studname, Sex, Course, Total score.

  1. Enter a Record
  2. List the Detail’s of all students
  3. Display Details of the student whose name ends with ‘Kumar’.
  4. List all Female students who got more than 50 marks.
  5. List all students who are studying either science or in Commerce group.
  6. List details of those students who are studying Humanities in the Descending order of their names.

Answer:

  1. Insert into Student values (52, ‘JOSE’, ‘Male’, ‘Science’, 500);
  2. Select*from Student;
  3. Select* from Student where name like ’%Kumar’;
  4. Select * from Student where sex=’Female’ and Total >50;
  5. Select * from Student where course = ‘science’ or course =‘commerce’;
  6. Select* from Student where course-‘Humanities’ order by name desc;

Question 7.
Construct a Table Product with the following fields using SQL.
Product code – Consist of Alphanumeric code.
Product name – Consist of maximum of 30 Alphabets
Unit price – Numeric values
Quantity – Numeric values
Product price – Numeric Values
Write Query for the following:

  1. Enter 5 records in the table (not give values for product prices)
  2. Calculate product price (unit price × quantity)
  3. List all product whose unit price ranging from 10 to 20
  4. Calculate total price of all products.

Answer:
Create table Product(ProdCode Varchar(20) not null primary key, ProdName char(30), UPrice decimal(7,2), Qty decimal(6), ProdPrice decimal(7,2));

  1. Insert into Product(Product Code,Product Name, Unit Price, Quantity) values (‘101 ’, ‘LUX’, 29.50,500); Similarly insert four more records
  2. Update Product set ProdPrice=Qty * UPrice;
  3. Select ProdName from Product where UPrice be-tween 10 and 20;
  4. Select sum(ProdPrice) from Product;

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 8.
Mr. Wilson wants to store the details of students. The details consist of different types of data. Explain different data types used in SQL to store data.
Answer:
The different data types are
1. Char (Fixed):
It is declared as char (size). This data type is used to store alphanumeric characters. We have to specify the size. If no size is specified, by default we can store only one character. Eg: name char(20)

2. Variable Character:
It is declared as varchar (size). This data type is also used to store alphanumeric characters. But there is a slight difference. lt allocates only enough memory to store the actual size.
Eg: name varchar(20)

3. Decimal:
It is declared as Dec(size, scale), where size is the number of digits and scale is the maximum number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
Eg: weight dec(3, 2)

4. Integer:
It is declared as int. It does not have any arguments. It takes more memory. Eg: ROllNO int.

5. Small Integer:
It is declared as smallint. It takes less memory ROllNO int.

6. Date:
It is used to store date. Eg: DOB date.

7. Time:
It is used to store time. Eg: Joining_Time Time.

Question 9.
A company wants to create a table to store its employees details. Write SQL Commands for the following :

  1. Create a table with EMP table having fields EMPNO primary key varchar(10), Name varchar(20), Salary number(6), Department varchar(3)
  2. Insert values to table
  3. List all employees whose salary > 10,000 Salary 10,000
  4. Display name and salary in the order of name.

Answer:

  1. Create table EMP (EMPNO varchar(10) not null primary key, Name varchar(20), Salary decimal(6), Deptvarchar(3));
  2. Insert into EMP values (‘1001 ’, ‘ALVIS’, 50000, ‘Sales’);
  3. Select * from EMP where salary > 10000;
  4. Select name, salary from EMP order by name;

Question 10.
Create a table ‘Savings’ with the following fields. Acc No (Integer), Name (char), age (Integer) and balance (Number) where Acc No is the primary key. Write SQL commands for the following.

  1. Insert data in all the fields for 3 records inserted
  2. Display the list of account holders in the ascending order Of their names.
  3. Display the list of all account holders having age between 20 and 30
  4. Display the name and Acc No of customers having a balance > 10 lakhs

Answer:
Create table Savings(Accno decimal(4) not null primary key, name char(2), age decimal(3), Balance decimal(8, 2));

  1. Insert into savings values (501, ‘Andrea’, 18,45000)
  2. Select * from Savings order by name
  3. Select * from Savings where age between 20 and 30
  4. Select name.accno from Savings where balance >100000

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Structured Query Language

Question 11.
Which are the components of SQL? How do they help to manage database?
Answer:
The components of SQL are given below.
a. DDL commands ( 3 commands):

  1. Create table – Used to create a table.
  2. Alter table – Used to modify existing column or add new column to an existing table. There are 2 keywords used ADD and MODIFY.
  3. Drop table – Used to remove a table from the memory.

b. DML commands ( 4 commands):

  1. Select – Used to select rows from a table. The keyword From is used with this. Where clause is used to specify the condition.
  2. Insert – Used to insert new records into a table. So the keyword used is INTO.
  3. Delete – Used to delete records in a table.
  4. Update – Used to modify the records in a table the keyword used is set.

c. DCL (Data Control Language) commands:

  1. Grant – It grants permission to the users to the database
  2. Revoke – It withdraws user’s rights given by using Grant command

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Students can Download Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability Questions and Answers, Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider the function g(x) = \(\frac{|x-2|}{x-2}\)

  1. Find the domain and range of the function g(x). (2)
  2. Check whether the g(x) is continuous at x = 2. (1)

Answer:
1. The function is not defined at points where denominator is zero.
i.e., x – 2 = 0 ⇒ x = 2.
∴ domain is R – {2}.
g(x) = \(\frac{|x-2|}{x-2}\) = \(\left\{\begin{array}{c}{\frac{x-2}{x-2}, \quad x-2>0} \\{\frac{-(x-2)}{x-2}, \quad x-2<0}\end{array}=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}{1,} & {x>2} \\{-1,} & {x<2}\end{array}\right.\right.\)
∴ range is {-1, 1}

2. The function g(x) is not defined at x = 2. Therefore discontinuous.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 2.
(i) If f(x) = x+|x| + 1, then which of the follow represents f (x) (1)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 1
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 2
(ii) Test whether f (x) is continuous at x=0. Explain. (2)
Answer:
(i) (b) Since, f(x) = \(\left\{\begin{array}{c}{x+x+1, x \geq 0} \\{x-x+1, \quad x<0}
\end{array}=\left\{\begin{array}{c}{2 x+1, x \geq 0} \\{1, x<0}\end{array}\right.\right.\)

(ii) We have ,f (0) = 1,
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 3
Continuous at x = 0.

Question 3.
Consider the function f(x) = \(\left\{\begin{array}{ll}{\frac{\sin x}{x}} & {, x<0} \\{x+1} & {, x \geq 0}\end{array}\right.\)

  1. Find \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 0} f(x)\) (2)
  2. Is f (x) continuous at x= 0? (1)

Answer:
1. To find \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 0} f(x)\) we have to find f(0 )and f(0+)
f(0) = \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 0} \frac{\sin x}{x}=1\),
f(0+) = \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 0}\) + 1 = 0 + 1 = 1
f(0) = f(0+) = 1 .Therefore \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 0} f(x)\) = 1

2. Here, f (0) = 0 + 1 = 1 = f(0) = f(0+) = 1
Therefore continuous at x = 0.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 4.
Consider the figure and answer the following questions.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 4
(i) Identify the graphed function. (1)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 5
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 6
(ii) Discuss the continuity of the above function at x = 2. (2)
Answer:
(i) (b) f(x) = \(\left\{\begin{array}{ll}{\frac{|x-2|}{x-2},} & {x \neq 2} \\{0,} & {x=2}\end{array}\right.\)

(ii) From the figure we can see that
f(2) = 1, f(2+) = -1 and f(2) = 0
Therefore, f(2) = 1 ≠ f(2+) = -1 ≠ f(2) = 0. Discontinuous.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 5.
Consider f(x) = \(\left\{\begin{array}{ll}{2 x} & {\text { if } x<2} \\{2} & {\text { if } x=2} \\ {x^{2}} & {\text { if } x>2}\end{array}\right.\)
(a) Find \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2^{-}} f(x)\) and \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2^{+}} f(x)\) (2)
(b) f(x) is continuous. If not so, how can you make it continuous. (1)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 7
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 8
Therefore f(x) is not continuous at x = 2.
If f(2) = 4, then f(x) becomes continuous.

Question 6.
If y = log10x + logx10 + logxx + log1010. Find \(.
Answer:
y = loge x log10e + loge10 logxe + 1 + 1
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 9

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 7.
Examine the continuity of the function
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 107
Answer:
In both the intervals x = 1 and x < 1 the function f(x) is a polynomial so continuous. So we have to check the continuity at x = 1.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 10
f(1) = 2
Since
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 11
f(x) is continuous at x = 1.

Question 8.
Find [latex]\frac{d y}{d x}\) of the following (3 score each)

  1. 2x + 3y = sinx
  2. xy + y2 = tanx + y
  3. x3 + x2y + xy2 + y3 = 81
  4. sin2x + cos2y = 1
  5. \(\sqrt{x}\) + \(\sqrt{y}\) = 1
  6. x2 + xy + y2 = 7
  7. x2(x – y) = y2(x + y)
  8. xy2 + x2y = 2
  9. sin y = xcos (a + y)

Answer:
1. Given; 2x + 3y = sinx
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 12

2. Given; xy + y2 = tanx + y
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 13

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

3. Given; x3 + x2y + xy2 + y3 = 81
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 14

4. Given; sin2x + cos2y = 1
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 15

5. \(\sqrt{x}\) + \(\sqrt{y}\) = 1
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 16

6. x2 + xy + y2 = 7
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 17

7. x2(x – y) = y2(x + y)
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 18

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

8. xy2 + x2y = 2
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 19

9. sin y = xcos (a + y)
⇒ x = \(\frac{\sin y}{\cos (a+y)}\)
Diff. with respect to y.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 20

Question 9.
Find \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) of the following (3 score each)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 21
(viii) x = a(t – sint), y = a(1 – cost)
(ix) y = et cost, x = et sint.
Answer:
(i) We know; y = sin-1\(\left(\frac{2 x}{1+x^{2}}\right)\)
⇒ y = = 2 tan-1(x)
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 22

(ii) We know; y = tan-1\(\left(\frac{3 x-x^{3}}{1-3 x^{2}}\right)\)
Put x = tanθ ⇒ θ = tan-1x
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 23
⇒ y = tan-1(tan3θ)
⇒ y = 3 tan-1(x)
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 24

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

(iii) We know; y = sin-1\(\left(\frac{1-x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}\right)\)
Put x = tanθ ⇒ θ = tan-1x
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 25

(iv) We know; y = sec-1 = \(\left(\frac{1}{2 x^{2}-1}\right)\)
Put x = cosθ ⇒ θ = cos-1x
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 26
⇒ y = sec-1 sec2θ = 2θ
⇒ y = 2cos-1(x)
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 27

(v) ∴ y = tan-1\(\sqrt{\tan ^{2} x / 2}\) = tan-1 tanx/2 = x/2
\(\frac{d y}{d x}=\frac{1}{2}\).

Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 28
= π – 2tan-1x
\(\frac{d y}{d x}=\frac{-2}{1+x^{2}}\).

(vii) Let x = sinθ and \(\sqrt{x}\) = sinφ
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 29
= sin-1 (sinθcosφ + cosφsinφ)
= sin-1 (sin(θ + φ)) = θ + φ
= sin-1x + sin-1\(\sqrt{x}\)
\(\frac{d y}{d x}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{1-x^{2}}}+\frac{1}{\sqrt{1-x}} \times \frac{1}{2 \sqrt{x}}\).

Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 30

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

(ix) y = etcost ⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d t}\) = – et sin t + et
x = et sint ⇒ \(\frac{d x}{d t}\) = et cos t + et sin t
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 31

Question 10.
If y = log\(\left(\frac{1}{x}\right)\), Show that \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) + ey = 0.
Answer:
Given, y = log\(\left(\frac{1}{x}\right)\) ? \(\left(\frac{1}{x}\right)\) = ey …….(1)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 32

Question 11.
If ey (x+1) = 1. Show that

  1. \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = -ey (2)
  2. \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d x^{2}}=\left(\frac{d y}{d x}\right)^{2}\) (1)

Answer:
1. ey (x+1) = 1
Differentiating ey +ey(x +1) \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 0
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 33

2.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 34

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 12.
(i) Evaluate \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 0} \frac{k \cos x}{\pi-2 x}\) (2)
(Hint: Put π – 2x = y , where Iris a constant)
(ii) Find the value of k if f (x) is a continuous function given by (1)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 35
Answer:
(i) \(\lim _{x \rightarrow \pi / 2} \frac{k \cos x}{\pi-2 x}=k \lim _{x \rightarrow \pi / 2} \frac{\cos x}{\pi-2 x}\),
Put π – 2x = y when Put x → π/2, y → 0
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 36

(ii) Since f (x) is continuous
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 37

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 13.
If f(x) \(f(x)=\left\{\begin{array}{cc}{x-[x]} & {, x<.2} \\{0} & {; x=2} \\{3 x-5} & {, x>2}
\end{array}\right.\)

  1. Find \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2} f(x)\) (2)
  2. Is f(x) continuous at x = 2? (1)

Answer:
1. To find \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2} f(x)\)
we have to find f(2) and f(2+)
f(2) = \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2} x-[x]\) = 2 -1 = 1,
f(2+) = \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2}\) 3x – 5 = 6 -5 = 1
f(2) = f(2+) = 1.
Therefore \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2}\) f(x) = 1

2. Here, f(2) = 0 ≠ f(2) = f(2+) = 1.
Therefore discontinuity at x = 2.

Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
If x = 2cosθ; y = 3sinθ

  1. Find \(\frac{d y}{d x}\).
  2. Find \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d x^{2}}\)

Answer:
1. x = 2cosθ ⇒ \(\frac{d x}{d θ}\) = -2sinθ
y = 3sinθ ⇒ \(\frac{d x}{d θ}\) = 3cosθ
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 38

2.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 39

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 2.
If y = (tan-1 x)2, show that (x2 +1)2 y2 + 2x(x2 +1) y1 = 2.
Answer:
y = (tan-1 x)2
⇒ y1 = 2(tan-1 x) \(\frac{1}{1+x^{2}}\)
⇒ (1 + x2)y1 = 2(tan-1 x)
⇒ (1 + x2)y2 + y12x = 2 \(\frac{1}{1+x^{2}}\)
⇒ (1 + x2)2 y2 + x(1 + x2)y1 = 2.

Question 3.
Find \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) if y = sin-1 \(\left(\frac{1-x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}\right)\), 0 < x < 1.
Answer:
Put x = tanθ
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 40

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 4.
Let f(x) = \(\left\{\begin{array}{ll}{\cos x,} & {0 \leq x \leq c} \\{\sin x,} & {c<x \leq \pi}\end{array}\right.\)

  1. Find the value of c if / is continuous on [0, π].
  2. Show that is f not differentiable at the point c.

Answer:
1. Since f is continuous on [0, π], we have;
\(\lim _{x \rightarrow c^{+}}\) f(x) = \(\lim _{x \rightarrow c^{-}}\) f(x) = f(c)
⇒ \(\lim _{x \rightarrow c^{+}}\) sinx = \(\lim _{x \rightarrow c^{-}}\) cosx = cosc
⇒ sinc = cosc ⇒ c = \(\frac{π}{4}\).

2. \(f^{\prime}(x)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}{-\sin x,} & {0 \leq x \leq c} \\{\cos x,} & {c<x \leq \pi}\end{array}\right. \)
Left derivative at \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) = – sin \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) = –\(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
Right derivative at \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) = cos \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
Left derivative at \(\frac{\pi}{4}\) ≠ Right derivative at \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
Therefore is not differentiable at the point c.

Question 5.

  1. Find \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) if x = 2sinθ; y = 3cosθ
  2. Which among the following functions is differentiable on R?

(a) |sinx|
(b) |cosx|
(c) cos|x|
(d) sin|x|
Answer:
1. \(\frac{d x}{d θ}\) = 2cosθ; \(\frac{d y}{d θ}\) = -3 sinθ ⇒ \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = \(-\frac{3}{2}\)tanθ

2. (c) cos|x|
(Since cos x is an even function, it treats x and -x in the same way).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 6.
(i) Examine whether the function defined by \(f(x)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}{x+5,} & {x \leq 1} \\{x-5,} & {x>1}\end{array}\right.\) is continuous or not. (2)
(ii) If x = sin-1t, y = cos-1t, a > 0, show that \(\frac{d y}{d x}=-\frac{y}{x}\)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 41
f(x) is not continuous.

Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 42

Question 7.
(i) If \(f(x)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}{1-x,} & {0 \leq x \leq 1} \\{1+x,} & {1<x \leq 2}\end{array}\right.\) then which of the following is not true (1)
(a) f is continuous in ( 0, 1 )
(b) f is continuous in (1, 2 )
(c) f is continuous in [ 0, 2 ]
(d) f is continuous in [ 0,1 ]
if \(\left\{\begin{array}{cc}{1,} & {x \leq 3} \\{a x+b} & {, \quad 3<x<5} \\{7,} & {5 \leq x}\end{array}\right.\)
(ii) Find f(3+) and f(5) (1)
(iii) Hence find the value of ‘a’ and ‘b’ so that f(x) is continuous. (2)
Answer:
(i) (c) Since f is not continuous at x = 1.

Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 43

(iii) Since f (x) is continuous, it is continuous at x = 3 and x = 5
∴ f(3+) = f(3) ⇒ 3a + b = 1 ____(1)
and f(5) = f(5) ⇒ 5a + b = 7 ____(2)
(2) – (1) ⇒ 2a = 6, a = 3
(1) ⇒ b = 1 – 3 a ⇒ b = -8
∴ a = 3, b = – 8.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 8.
Consider f(x) = \(\left\{\begin{array}{ll}{2 x+3,} & {x \leq 2} \\{x+2 k,} & {x>2}\end{array}\right.\)

  1. Find f(2) (1)
  2. Evaluate \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2^{+}}\)f(x) (1)
  3. Find the value of k, if is continuous at x = 2. (2)

Answer:
1. f(2) = 2(2) + 3 = 7

2. Here, f(x) = x + 2k for x > 2.
\(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2^{+}}\)f(x) = \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2}\)(x + 2k) = 2 + 2k.

3. Since f (x) is continuous at x = 2
We have, f(2) = \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 2^{+}}\)f(x)
⇒ 7 = 2 + 2k ⇒ k = \(\frac{5}{2}\)

Question 9.
Find \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) of the following (4 score each)

  1. y = (logx)cosx
  2. x = 2at2, y = at4
  3. x = a(cosθ + θsinθ), y = a(sinθ – θcosθ)
  4. y=xx
  5. y =(x log x)log(logx)
  6. y = \(\sqrt{\sin x \sqrt{\sin x+\sqrt{\sin x+\ldots .}}}\)
  7. yx = xsiny
  8. y =(log x)x + xlogx
  9. y = (sinx)x + sin-1 \(\sqrt{x}\)

Answer:
1. Given; y = (logx)cosx, taking log on both sides;
log y = cosxlog(logx),
Differentiating with respect to x;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 44

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

2. Given; x = 2at2 ⇒ \(\frac{d x}{d t}\) = 4at
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 45

3. Given; x = a(cosθ + θsinθ)
\(\frac{d x}{d \theta}\) = a(-sinθ + θcosθ + sinθ) = aθcosθ
y = a(sinθ – θcosθ)
\(\frac{d x}{d \theta}\) = a(cosθ – θ(-sinθ) – cosθ) = aθ sinθ
\(\frac{d y}{d x}=\frac{a \theta \sin \theta}{a \theta \cos \theta}=\tan \theta\)

4. y= xx; Taking log on both sides;
log y = x log x
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 46

5. y = (x log x)log logx
Taking log on both sides;
log y = (log log x) [log (xlogx)]
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 47

6. y = \(\sqrt{\sin x+y}\) ⇒ y2 = sinx + y
⇒ y2 – y = sinx
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 48

7. yx = xsin y;
Taking log on both sides;
xlogy = siny log x
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 49

8. y = (log x)x + xlogx = u + v
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 50
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 51

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

9. y = (sinx)x + sin-1\(\sqrt{x}\)
Let u = (sinx)x ⇒ log u = x log sinx
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 52

Question 10.
Find \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d x^{2}}\) of the following

  1. y = x2 + 3x + 2 (2)
  2. y = tan-1x (2)

Answer:
1. Given; y = x2 + 3x + 2
Differentiating with respect to x;
\(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = 2x + 3
Differentiating again with respect to x;
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d x^{2}}\) = 2.

2. Given; y = tan-1x
Differentiating with respect to x; \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = \(\frac{1}{1+x^{2}}\)
Differentiating again with respect to x;
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d x^{2}}\) = \(-\frac{1}{\left(1+x^{2}\right)^{2}} \cdot 2 x\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 11.
Match the following. (4)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 53
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 54

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 12.
If x – sint and y = sinmt show that
(i) y = sin(m sin-1x) (1)
(ii) \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) (1)
(iii) (1 – x2) y2 – xy1 + m2y = 0 (2)
Answer:
(i) x = sint, y = sinmt
t = sin-1x ⇒ y = sin(msin-1x).
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 55
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 56
multiplying with \(\sqrt{1-x^{2}}\)
(1 – x2) y2 – xy1 = -m2y
(1 – x2) y2 – xy1 + m2y = 0.

Question 13.
Consider the function f(x) = x(x – 2), x ∈ [1, 3]. Verify mean value theorem for the function in[1, 3].
Answer:
f(x) = x(x – 2) = x2 – 2x ⇒ f'(x) = 2x – 2.
As f is a polynomial, it is continuous in the interval [1, 3] and differentiable in the interval (1, 3).
Therefore two conditions of MVT are satisfied and so there exists c ∈ (1,3)such that.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 57
Hence MVT is verified.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 14.
Verify Lagranges’ Mean value theorem for the function f(x) = 2x2 – 10x + 29 in [2, 9]
Answer:
f(x) = 2x2 – 10x + 29; f'(x) = 4x – 10.
As f is a polynomial, it is continuous in the interval [2, 9] and differentiable in the interval (2, 9).
Therefore two conditions of MVT are satisfied and so there exists c ∈ (2, 9) such that.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 58
Hence MVT is verified.

Question 15.
Let f(x) = x(x – 1)(x – 2), x ∈ [0, 2]

  1. Find f(0) and f(2) (1)
  2. Find f'(x) (1)
  3. Find the values of x when f'(x) = 0 verify Rolle’s theorem. (2)

Answer:
1. f(0) = 0, f(2) = 2(2 – 1)(2 – 2) = 0

2. We have, f(x) = x3 – 3x2 + 2x
⇒ f'(x) = 3x2 – 6x + 2.

3. f'(x) = 3x2 – 6x + 2 = 0
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 59
Clearly all the three conditions of Rolle’s theorem are satisfied and 1 ± \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\) ∈ (0, 2).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 16.
Verify Rolle’s Theorem for the function
f(x) = x2 + 2x – 8, x ∈ [-4, 2]
Answer:
f(x) = x2 + 2x – 8, f'(x) = 2x + 2.
As f is a polynomial, it is continuous in the interval [-4, 2] and differentiable in the interval (-4, 2).
f(-4) = 16 – 8 – 8 = 0
f(2) = 4 + 4 – 8 = 0
f'(c) = 0 ⇒ 2c + 2 = 0 ⇒ c = -1 ∈ (-4, 2) Hence Rolle’s Theorem is verified.

Question 17.
Examine that Rolle’s Theorem is applicable to the following function in the given intervals, justify your answer.

  1. f(x) = [x], x ∈ [5, 9]
  2. f(x) = x2 – 1, x ∈ [1, 2]

Answer:
1. The function f(x) = [x] is not differentiable and continuous at integral values. So in the given interval [5, 9] the function is neither differentiable nor continuous at x = 6, 7 ,8. Therefore Rolle’s Theorem is not applicable.

2. The function f(x) = x2 – 1 is a polynomial function so differentiable and continuous.
f(1) = 1 – 1 = 0, f(2) = 4 – 1 = 3
f(1) ≠ f(2) . Therefore Rolle’s Theorem is not applicable.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 18.
Examine the continuity of the function
\(f(x)=\left\{\begin{array}{cc}{|x|+3,} & {x \leq-3} \\{-2 x,} & {-3<x<3} \\{6 x+2,} & {x \geq 3}\end{array}\right.\)
Answer:
In the intervals x ≤ -3, f(x) is the sum of a constant function and modulus function so continuous. In the intervals -3 < x < 3 and x ≥ 3the function f(x) is a polynomial so continuous. Hence we have to check the continuity at x = -3, x = 3.
At x = -3
f(-3) = 6
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 3 Mark Questions and Answers 60
f(x) is continuous at x = -3.
At x = 3
f(3) = 6(3) + 2 = 20
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 61
Since \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 3^{-}}\)f(x) = f(3), f(x) is not continuous at x = 3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 19.
Test continuity for the following functions.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 62
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 63
= 0 × a finite quantity between -1 and 1 = 0 Also f(0) = 0
Therefore f(x) is continuous at x = 0.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 64
Therefore f(x) is discontinuous at x = 0
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 65
But f(1) = 2
∴ f(x) is discontinuous at x = 1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 20.
If y = \(\frac{\sin ^{-1} x}{\sqrt{1-x^{2}}}\) prove that
(i) (1 – x2) y2 = (sin-1x)2 (1)
(ii) (1 – x2)y1 – xy = 1 (1)
(iii) (1 – x2) y2 – 3xy1 – y = 0 (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 66
(ii) Differentiating
(1 – x2) 2y.y1 + y2x – 2x = \(\frac{2 \sin ^{-1} x}{\sqrt{1-x^{2}}}\)
(1 – x2)2yy1 – 2xy2 = 2y
(1 – x2) y1 – xy = 1.

(iii) Again differentiating
(1 – x2) y2 + y1 x – 2x – xy1 – y = 0
(1 – x2) y2 – 3xy1 – y = 0.

Question 21.
At what point on the curve y = x2, x ∈ [-2, 2] at which the tangent is parallel to x-axis?
Answer:
Y = x2, a continuous function on [-2, 2] and differentiable on [-2, 2] f(2) = 4 = f(-2). All conditions of Rolles theorem is satisfied. Given the tangent is parallel to x-axis.
f1 (x) = 2x
f1(c) = 2c
f1(c) = 0 ⇒ 2c = 0 ⇒ c = 0 ∈ [-2, 2]
where c = 0, y = 0
Therefore (0, 0) is the required point.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 22.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 67
is continuous in the interval [-1 1].
(a) Find \(\lim _{x \rightarrow 0}\)f(x) (2)
(b) Find f(0). (1)
(c) Find P. (1)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 68
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 69
(c) Since f is continuous in [-1 1] it is continuous at 0.
Therefore P = \(-\frac{1}{2}\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 23.
If ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 1

  1. Find \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) (1)
  2. Find \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d x^{2}}\) (3)

Answer:
1. We have, ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 1 ___(1)
Differentiating w.r.t.x, we get,
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 70

2. Differentiating (2) w.r.tx, we get,
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 71
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 72

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 24.
Consider the function y = xx \(\sqrt{x}\)

  1. Express the above function as logy = \(\left(x+\frac{1}{2}\right)\) logx (2)
  2. Find \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) (2)

Answer:
1. Given, y = xx \(\sqrt{x}\). Take log on both sides,
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 73

2. We have, logy = \(\left(x+\frac{1}{2}\right)\) logx
Differentiating w.r.t x, we get,
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 74

Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability Six Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.

  1. Verify mean value theorem for the function f(x) = (x – 2)2 in [1, 4].
  2. Find a point on the curve y = (x – 2)2 at which the tangent is parallel to the chord joining the points (1, 1) and (4, 2)
  3. Find a point on the above curve at which the tangent is parallel to the x-axis.

Answer:
1. f(x) = (x – 1)2, x ∈ [1, 4]
f(x) is continuous in [1, 4]
f'(x) = 2(x – 2) is differentiable in [1, 4]
Then there exists c ∈ [1, 4] so that
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 75
Hence Mean Value Theorem is verified.

2. c = \(\frac{5}{2}\) will be the x-coordinate to the point of contact of tangent and the curve, then y = (x – 2)2 ⇒ y = (\(\frac{5}{2}\) – 2)2 = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Therefore the point is (\(\frac{5}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{4}\)).

3. The tangent parallel to x- axis will have
f'(c) = 0 ⇒ 2(c – 2) = 0 ⇒ c = 2
Then; x = 2 ⇒ y = (2 – 2)2 = 0
Therefore the point is (2, 0).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 2.

  1. Differentiate xsinx w.r.t.x (2)
  2. If x = at2, y = 2at, then find \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) (2)
  3. If y = sin-1(cosx) + cos-1(sinx), then find \(\frac{d y}{d x}\). (2)

Answer:
1. Let y = xsinx, take log on both sides,
log y = sinx logx differentiate w. r.t.x, we get
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 76

2.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 77

3. Given, y = sin-1(cosx) + cos-1(sinx)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 78
Differentiate w.r.t. x, we get \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = -2.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 3.

  1. Differentiate \(\frac{x-1}{x-3}\) with respect to x.(2)
  2. Differentiate \(\sqrt{\frac{(x-1)(x-2)}{(x-3)(x-4)(x-5)}}\) with respect to x. (4)

Answer:
1. Let y = \(\frac{x-1}{x-3}\) Differentiate w.r.t. x, we get;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 79

2. Given, y = \(\sqrt{\frac{(x-1)(x-2)}{(x-3)(x-4)(x-5)}}\)
Take log on both sides;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 80
Differentiate w.r.t. x, we get;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 81

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 4.
(i) Define |x|
(a) |x| = \(\sqrt{x^{2}}\)
(b) |x| = x
(c) |x| = -x
(d) |x| = x2
(ii) At which point \(\frac{d}{d x}\)|x| does not exist?
Find \(\frac{d}{d x}\) |x|. (2)
(iii) Find \(\frac{d}{d x}\)|x3 – 7x| . Also, find the point at which the derivative exists. (3)
Answer:
(i) (a) |x| = \(\sqrt{x^{2}}\).

(ii) At x = 0, \(\frac{d}{d x}\) |x| does not exist.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 82
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 83
Does not exist at
x3 – 7x = 0 ⇒ x(x2 – 7) = 0
⇒ x = 0, x2 – 7 = 0 ⇒ x = ±\(\sqrt{7}\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 5.
(i) Match the following (4)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 84
(ii) If log (x2 + y2) = 2 tan-1\(\left(\frac{y}{x}\right)\), then, show that \(\frac{d y}{d x}=\frac{x+y}{x-y}\) (2)
Answer:
(i)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 85

(ii) Given, log (x2 + y2) = 2 tan-1\(\left(\frac{y}{x}\right)\).
Differentiate w.r.to x, we get;
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 86
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 87

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 6.
If x = a sec3θ and y = a tan3θ
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 88
Answer:
(i) Given, x = a sec3θ
Differentiate w.r.to θ, we get;
\(\frac{d x}{d \theta}\) = 3a sec2θ. secθ. tanθ = 3a sec3 θ. tan θ
Given, y = a tan3θ .
Differentiating w.r.to θ, we get
\(\frac{d x}{d \theta}\) = 3a tan2 θ. sec2θ.
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 89

(iii) We have, \(\frac{d y}{d x}\) = sinθ
Differentiating w.r.to x, we get
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 90

(iv) We have,
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 91

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 7.
Consider the function \(f(x)=\left\{\begin{array}{cc}{1-x} & {, \quad x<0} \\{1} & {x=0} \\ {1+x} & {, \quad x>0}\end{array}\right.\)
(i) Compete the following table. (2)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 92
(ii) Draw a rough sketch of f (x). (2)
(iii) What is your inference from the graph about Its continuity. Verify your answer using limits. (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 93
Since, f (- 2) = 1 – (- 2) = 3, f (-1) = 1 – (-1) = 2,
f(1) = 1 + (1) = 2, f (2) = 1 + (2) = 3.

(ii)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 94

(iii) From the graph we can see that there is no break or jump at x = 0. Therefore continuous.
From the figure we can see that
f(0) = 1 f(0+) = 1 and f(0) = 1
Hence, f(0) = f(0+) = f(0) = 1.
Therefore continuous.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 8.
Consider the equation \(\sqrt{1-x^{2}}+\sqrt{1-y^{2}}=a(x-y)\)
(i) Simplify the above equation to sin-1x – sin-1y = 2cot-1 a by giving suitable substitution.
(ii) Prove that \(\frac{d y}{d x}=\sqrt{\frac{1-y^{2}}{1-x^{2}}}\)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 95
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 96

(ii) We have; sin-1 x – cos-1y = 2cot-1a.
Differentiating w.r.t x, we get,
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 97

Question 9.
(i) Match the following. (4)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 98
(ii) If y = ea cos-1x, then show that (1 – x2)y2 – xy1 – a2y = 0 (2)
Answer:
(i)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 99

(ii) Given, y = ea cos-1x ____(1)
Differentiating w.r.to x,
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 100
Again differentiating w. r.to x
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 101
⇒ (1 – x2)y2 – xy1 = a2. ea cos-1x
⇒ (1 – x2)y2 – xy1 = a2y
⇒ (1 – x2)y2 – xy1 – a2y = 0.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Continuity and Differentiability

Question 10.
(i) Match the following (3)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 102
Differentiate the following
(ii) y =\(\frac{1}{5 x^{2}+3 x+7}\) (1)
(iii) y = 3cosec4(7x) (1)
(iv) y = e2log tan 5x (1)
Answer:
(i)
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 103
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 104

(iii) Given,
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 105

(iv) Given,
Plus Two Maths Continuity and Differentiability 4 Mark Questions and Answers 106

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Students can Download Chapter 8 Database Management System Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Plus Two Computer Science Database Management System One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Select the property which is desirable for a database.
(a) Redundancy
(b) Inconsistency
(c) Integrity
(d) Complexity
Answer:
(c) Integrity

Question 2.
Pick the odd man out.
Answer:
(a) Create
(b) Select
(c) Update
(d) Insert
Answer:
(a) Create

Question 3.
______ is the ability to modify a schema definition in one level without affecting the schema definition in the next higher level.
Answer:
Data Independence

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 4.
For accessing data from a database, provides an interface with programming languages.
Answer:
SQL(orDML)

Question 5.
Give an example for RDBMS package.
Answer:
Packages such as Oracle, My SQL, etc.

Question 6.
Name the key that acts as a candidate key but not a primary key.
Answer:
Alternate key

Question 7.
With the help of ______ the process of storing, retrieving and modifying data are greatly simplified.
Answer:
DBMS

Question 8.
If _____ is controlled , DBMS can guarantee that database is never inconsistent.
Answer:
Redundancy.

Question 9.
The property of a DBMS that guarantees that the database is never inconsistent.
Answer:
Redundancy.

Question 10.
_____ and ______ are the two types of integrity checks.
Answer:
Range checks, Value checks.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 11.
Which component of DBMS provides interfaces with programming Languages ________.
Answer:
DML

Question 12.
The level of database abstraction that describes how the data is actually stored in the storage medium.
Answer:
Physical level.

Question 13.
The level of database abstraction that describes what data are stored in the database.
Answer:
Logical level.

Question 14.
Database Administrators (DBA) are more concerned with level ____ of Abstraction.
Answer:
Logical level

Question 15.
The programmers are connected with ______ .level of abstraction.
Answer:
Logical level.

Question 16.
The teller at a bank sees only that part of the database that has information on customer accounts. Which level of Database abstraction he is at?
Answer:
View level.

Question 17.
As part of project work, Ashish defines the type of data and the relationship among them. He is at _____ level of database abstraction.
Answer:
Logical.

Question 18.
_____ is the other name for logical level
Answer:
Conceptual level

Question 19.
if the modifications made on storage format does not affect the structure of data, then we achieve ___ data independence.
Answer:
Physical data independence.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 20.
Pick the odd one out.
(a) network model
(b) hybrid model
(c) relational model
(d) hierarchical model
Answer:
(b) hybrid model

Question 21.
“I am a data model. My records can have more than one parent record” Who am I?
Answer:
Network model.

Question 22.
Name the language that enables user to access or manipulate data as organized by RDBMS.
Answer:
DBML

Question 23.
A Database Administrator is able to modify the structure a programmer changes data types and length of a database without affecting certain fields in a database of a bank and the program. Identify the data independence associated in it.
Answer:
Logical data Independence

Question 24.
Name the language that used to define a database scheme.
Answer:
DDL

Question 25.
Name the person who has central control over the database and programs in DBMS
(a) Naive user
(b) Programmer
(c) Database Administrator
(d) System Analyst
Answer:
(c) Database Administrator

Question 26.
Oracle DBMS package is based on _____ model.
Answer:
Relational

Question 27.
Match the following.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img1
Answer:
a – ii
b – iii
c – i

Question 28.
Name the Relational operation which selects certain columns from the table while discarding others.
Answer:
Project.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 29.
How to define the Domain of a column ‘subject 1’of MARKS relation.
Answer:
Range of values from 0 to 100

Question 30.
State whether true or False.
A view is a kind of table whose contents are taken from other tables.
Answer:
True.

Question 31.
State True or False.
A view can be queried, inserted into, updated and deleted from.
Answer:
True.

Question 32.
Name an efficient way to provide only required data to users hiding other data from the database.
Answer:
View.

Question 33.
Pick the key which can not be used to uniquely identify a tuple on a relation:
(Candidate Key, Primary Key, Alternate Key, Super Key, None of these)
Answer:
None of these.

Question 34.
π (pi) Greek letter is used to denote ______ operation in relational algebra.
Answer:
Project.

Question 35.
Which relational Algebra operation returns all possible combinations of tuples from two relations.
Answer:
Cartesian product.

Question 36.
Pick the odd one out.
(Select, Cartesian product, Union, intersection)
Answer:
Select – unary operator.

Question 37.
What will be the cardinality of the resultant table if after the following operation if the cardinality of STUDENT is 5 and INSTRUCTOR is 3?
Student × Instructor
Answer:
15.

Question 38.
Consider two relations FOOTBALL AND CRICKET, How to get the names of players play only cricket not also FOOTBALL.
Answer:
CRICKET – FOOTBALL.

Question 39.
Why we call a Foreign Key so?
Answer:
it is a candidate Key in another table, A foreigner.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 40.
______ is range of values from which actual values are appearing in a given column are drawn.
Answer:
Domain

Question 41.
Name the table that does not contain data of its own, but is derived from a base table.
Answer:
View

Question 42.
Name a way to uniquely identify a tuple in a relation.
Answer:
By using primary key.

Question 43.
Give two Unary operations performed on a relation in Relational Algebra.
Answer:
Select, Project.

Question 44.
Data redundancy is not a desirable property. But All redundancy can not or should not be eliminated. Do you agree with this statement? Justify.
Answer:
Yes. Because sometimes there can be technical or business reasons for maintaining several distinct copies of same data.

Question 45.
Anju is able to do all the internal operations in a DBMS. What type of user is she? What are the other type of users?
Answer:
DBA, Other type users are Appl Programmer and Naive users.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 46.
Which of the following statements are true?
(1) DBMS facilitates storage, retrieval, and management of databases.
(2) We must keep more copies of the same data in databases.
(3) Data inconsistency is eliminated in DBMS.
(4) DBMS allows sharing of data but does not ensure security.
Choose the correct option from the following:
(a) Both (1) and (3) are true
(b) Statements (1), (3) and (4) are true
(c) Statements (1), (2) and (4) are true
(d) All statements are true
Answer:
(a) Both (1) and (3) are true

Question 47.
Which of the following refers to duplication of data in files?
(a) Data redundancy
(b) Data inconsistency
(c) Data integrity
(d) Data security
Answer:
(a) Data redundancy

Question 48.
The following are some responsibilities of database users. Which of them belongs to Database Administrator?
(1) Design the conceptual schema of the database.
(2) Develops programs to interact with the database.
(3) Interacts with the database through queries.
(4) Ensures authorised and secured access of data
Choose the correct option from the following:
(a) Both (1) and (3)
(b) Except (2) and (3)
(c) (1), (2) and (4)
(d) All four
Answer:
(b) Except (2) and (3)

Question 49.
Which of the keys in a relation do not allow null values? Choose the most appropriate option from the following.
(a) Primary key
(b) Candidate key
(c) Both primary key and candidate key
(d) Either primary key or candidate key
Answer:
(c) Both primary key and candidate key

Question 50.
Choose the level of database abstraction that describes what data is stored in the database and what relationships exist among them,
(a) External
(b) Logical
(c) Physical
(d) View
Answer:
(b) Logical

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 51.
Which of the following operations can extract the specified columns of a table?
(a) Selection
(b) Projection
(c) Intersection
(d) Set Difference
Answer:
(b) Projection

Plus Two Computer Science Database Management System Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The schema of a table is EMPLOYEE (emp_code, emp_name, designation, salary). Write down the relational expressions for the following:
a) To get the name and designation of all employees.
b) To get the details of employees whose salary is above 25000.
c) To get the names of employees who designation is Manager.
d) To get the details of Managers with salary less than 25000.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img2

Question 2.
Data sharing is an essential feature of DBMS. How data sharing reduces the data inconsistency in a database? Data sharing is an essential feature of DBMS. How data sharing reduces the data inconsistency in a database?
Answer:
Instead of storing more than one copy of the same data, it stores only one copy. This can be shared by several users. If redundancy occurs there is a chance to inconsistency. If redundancy is removed then in-consistency cannot occur.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 3.
Pick the odd one out and justify your answer:
(a) Column
(b) Attribute
(c) Field
(d) Tuple
Answer:
(d) Tuple. The other three terminologies indicate the same characteristic of a table.

Question 4.
Suppose a table (relation) contains the details of customers in a bank. Which attribute of the customer will be set as primary key for the table? Give reason for your opinion.
Answer:
Account number can be set as primary key since account number is different. different customers. That is it is unique hence it can be set as primary key.

Question 5.
How many distinct tuples and attributes are there in relation with cardinality 22 and degree 7.
Answer:

  • Cardinality is the number of rows (tuples)
  • Hence number Of tuples is 22
  • Degree is the number of columns (attributes)
  • Hence number of attributes 7

Question 6.
Distinguish primary key and alternate key.
Answer:

  • Primary key: It is a set of one or more attributes used to uniquely identify a row.
  • Alternate key: A candidate key other than the primary key.

Question 7.
Write an example for relational data model.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img3

Question 8.
Observe the following table and choose the correct match from the following options.

Column A

Column B

1. Cardinality
2. Degree
3. Relation
4. Tuple
A. Row of a table
B. Table
C. Number of rows
D. Number of columns
E. Attribute

(a) 1 → B, 2 → D, 3 → E, 4 → C
(b) 1 → C, 2 → D, 3 → E, 4 → A
(c) 1 → C, 2 → D, 3 → B, 4 → A
(d) 1 → D, 2 → C, 3 → B, 4 → E
Answer:
(c) 1 → C, 2 → D, 3 → B, 4 → A

Question 9.
Consider the table with the following fields Name, RollNumberand Mark for a set of students. Suggest a field among them, which is suitable for primary key. Justify your answer.
Answer:
field RollNOmber is suitable for the primary key. The name and mark can have same values so they are not suitable for the primary key.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 10.
Raju is confused with the statement ‘logical data independence is more difficult to achieve than physical data independence. How can you help Raju to understand the statement?
Answer:
Because Appl. Programs heavily dependent on the logical structure of data. So any change in structure means chance of rewriting Appl. Programs.

Question 11.
Match the following.

A

B

a. DBAi. querying and updating
b. Application programmerii. ensures consistency
c. Naive usersiii. defines conceptual view

Answer:
a – ii
b – iii
c – i.

Question 12
Match the following.

AB
a. The hierarchical modeli. data as tables
b. Network modelii. Network as storage medium
c. Relational modeliii. Child record can have more than one parent
iv. Tree structure

Answer:
a – iv
b – iii
c – i.

Question 13.
Your friend tells you that only relational model is used nowadays as DBMS. Will you agree with that? Justify.
Answer:
Yes. Other two models are complex. In.RDMS, no redundancy, and relationships can be formed easily.

Question 14.
The telephone number of Gokul is entered in Library file as 802111 and in admission register file as 802171.

  1. Can you correlate this problem with a concept in DBMS?
  2. Can you propose a solution to avoid this?

Answer:
Consistency problem, Remove data redundancy

Question 15.
What is DBMS?
Answer:
A DBMS is used to store large volumes of data and it is used to retrieve data whenever needed, edit the existing data, update the data and it is possible to delete also.

Question 16.
“View provides an excellent way to access data from data.” Do you agree with this statement? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Yes. Views can have data from more than one table, view can be queried, inserted into, deleted from and updated like a normal table.

Question 17.
A relation is given below
STUDENT
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img4
Mark the following:
Tuple, Attributes, Cardinality, Degree
Answer:

  • Tuple – It is the Rows
  • Attributes – It is the columns
  • Cardinality – 3 (Number of Rows)
  • Degree – 4 (Number of Columns)

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 18.
State whether true or False.

  1. Primary key cannot be composite key.
  2. Only a candidate key can become a Primary Key.
  3. Foreign key of a table js a candidate key in another table.
  4. A super key uniquely identifies a row in a relation.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True
  3. True
  4. True

Question 19.
Explain the meaning of following operations.
Answer:
select the tuples whose department is sales and who have salary > 5000.

Question 20.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img5
Is it possible to find the players who play both FOOTBALL AND CRICKET by applying any of the Relational Algebra Operations? Explain.
Answer:
Intersection operation.
FOOTBALL ∩ CRICKET

Question 21.
How will you differentiate Primary key and Super Key?
Answer:

  • primary key – one of the candidate keys chosen to uniquely identify the rows of a table.
  • Super key – Combination of a Primary key with any other attribute or group of attributes.

Question 22.
Cardinality of a table T1 is 10 and of table, T2 is 8 and the two relations are union compatible. If the cardinality of result T1 ∪ T2 is 13, then what is the cardinality of T1 ∩ T2? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Cardinality of table T1 is 10 means it has 10 rows Cardinalty of table T2 is 8 means it has 8 rows Normally T1 ∪ T2 is 10 + 8 = 18 But Here T1 ∪ T2 is 13 means after eliminating duplication of 5 rows this happened. This means 5 rows are common That is T1 ∩ T2 is 5.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 23.
Cardinality of a table T1 is 10 and of table, T2 is 8 and the two relations are union compatible.

  1. What will be the maximum possible cardinality of T1 ∪ T2?
  2. What will be the minimum possible cardinality of T1 ∩ T2?

Answer:
1. Degree(CD) – The number of Columns is the Degree
Cardinality (RC) – the number of Rows is the Cardinality
T1 ∪ T2 = Sum of cardinalities of Table1 and Table2.
i. e.T1 ∪ T2 = 10 + 8 = 18

2. T1 ∩ T2 is the common rows(tuples) in T1 and T2 If there is no common tuples then T1 ∩ T2is o hence the cardinality is 0.

Plus Two Computer Science Database Management System Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
For catering to the needs of users, a database is implemented through three general levels. Name the three levels and discuss them.
Answer:
1. Physical Level is the lowest level. it describes how the data is actually stored in the storage medium. At physical level complex, low-level data structures are described in detail.

2. Logical level describes what data are stored in the database and what relationships exist among data. Here database is described in terms of simple structures. Records are defined in this level. Programmers work at this level.

3. View level is the highest level of data abstraction. It is concerned with the way in which the users view the database. It describes only part of the database.

Question 2.
Consider the following table arid write relational algebra operations for the following DEPOSIT.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img6

  1. To display those tuples from DEPOSIT relation where amount is greater than 25,000.
  2. To display only AccNo and Amount of all depositors.

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img7

Question 3.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img8
Show the output of the following relational operations.
a) R1 – R2
b) R1 ∩ R2
c) R1 ∪ R2
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img9

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 4.
Developers hide the complexity of Database system three several levels of abstraction. What are they?
Answer:
Physical – logical – view level.
(how data) (what data) (view data)

Physical Level is the lowest level. It describes how the data is actually stored in the storage medium. At physical level complex, low-level data structures are described in detail.

Logical level describes what data are stored in the database and what relationships exist among data. Here database is described in terms of simple structure. Records are defined in this level. Programmers work at this level.

View level is the highest level of data abstraction. It is concerned with the way in which the users view the database. It describes only part of the database.

Question 5.
How data are organized in a database.
Answer:

  • Field: Smallest unit of data. Eg: RolINo, Name
  • Record: Collection of related fields. Eg: The information of a particular student.
  • File: Collection of related records. Eg: The information of 10 students.

Question 6.
Salih checks his account details using an ATM machine.

  1. Identify the levels of abstraction associated with this?
  2. Specify other levels.

Answer:

  1. View level
  2. Logical level Physical level

Question 7.
Match the following.

A

B

1. Database Administratora. Not concerned with or even aware of details of the DBMS
2. Application Programmerb. Person who has central control over definition and DBMS
3. Usersc. Computer professionals who interact with the DBMS through Application programs

Answer:
1 – b
2 – c
3 – a.

Question 8.
Match the following.

AB
DomainTable
TupleNo. of rows in a relation
AttributeNo. of columns in a relation
CardinalityRows in a relation
DegreeA pool of values
RelationColumn in a Table

Answer:

AB
DomainA pool of values
TupleRows in a relation
AttributeColumn in a Table
CardinalityNo. of rows in a relation
DegreeNo. of columns in a relation
RelationTable

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 9.
Explain the major components of DBMS.
Answer:
Components of DBMS

  1. Databases – It is the main component.
  2. Data Definition Language (DDL) – It is used to define the structure of a table.
  3. Data Manipulation Language (DML) – It is used to add, retrieve, modify and delete records in a database.
  4. Users- With the help of programs users interact with the DBMS.

Question 10.
Categorise the users of DBMS and write their functions.
Answer:
Users of Database

  1. Database Administrator – It is a person who has central control over the DBMS.
  2. Application Programmer – These are computer professionals who interact with the DBMS through programs.
  3. Naive users – He is an end user. He does not know the details of DBMS.

Question 11.
A table with three columns is given below. For each relational operation given in the 1st column find the best matches from 2nd and 3rd columns.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img10
Answer:
1. Select → c) o → (ii)
2. Union → d) ∪ → (iv)
3. Set difference → b) – → (i)

Question 12.
Observe the given table BOOK and write down the outputs of the following relational expressions:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img11
Answer:
a. This query returns all the tuples(rows) that contain BPB in column Publisher.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img12
b. This query returns the column Book_Title with price < 200.
Book Title
Computer Fundamentals C++ Programming Mystery of Chemistry.

Plus Two Computer Science Database Management System Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Cardinality of table A is 10 and of table, B is 8 and the two relations are union compatible.
What will be the maximum possible cardinality of (A ∪ B) and (A ∩ B)?
What will be the minimum possible cardinality of (A ∪ B) and (A ∩ B)?
Give justifications for your answers.
Answer:
1. Both relations contain different tuples (rows).
2. The 8 tuples (rows) of table B are same as that of table A.
Case 1.
If both relations contain different tuples then the maximum possible cardinality of A ∪ B is 10 + 8 = 18
Case 2.
If 8 tuples of table B are same as that of table A then the maximum possible cardinality of A C B is 8.
Case 3
If 8 tuples of table B are same as that of table A then the minimum possible cardinality of A ∪ B is 10.
Case 4.
If both relations contain different tuples then the mini-mum possible cardinality of A ∩ B is 0.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 2.
There are different data models of which one is currently used in all business transactions. Specify it and discuss in detail.
Answer:
Relational data model is currently used in all business transactions. It is based on the concept introduced by E F Codd. It is composed of one or more tables. Tables are made up of rows and columns. Here tables are called relations, rows are called tuples and the columns are called attributes. The advantages of this model is neither data redundancy nor complexity.
Eg:

CustomerAddress
GitaAdd1
LataAdd2
RamAdd 3

Question 3.
You have to present a seminar on the topic “Keys in RDBMS”. Prepare the seminar report.
Answer:

  1. Candidate Key: It is a set of attributes that uniquely identifies a row. There may be more than candidate key and maybe a combination of more than one attribute.
  2. Primary Key: A primary key is one of the Candidate Keys. It is a set of one or more attributes that can uniquely identify tuples in a relation.
  3. Alternate Key: The Candidate key that is not the. primary key is called the alternate key.
  4. Super Key: A combination of a primary key with any other attribute or group of attributes is called a super key.
  5. Foreign Key: A single attribute or a set of attributes, which is a candidate key in another table, is called foreign key.

Question 4.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img13
Consider the relations STUDENT and GRADE given above and predict the output of the following relational operations in table format.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img14
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img15
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System img16

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Database Management System

Question 5.
Explain any 4 Relational Algebra Operations.
Answer:
1. SELECT operation:
SELECT operation is used to select tuples in a relation that satisfies a selection condition. Greek letter a (sigma) is used to denote the operation. Syntax – σ condition(relation)
eg. σsalary < 10000 (EMPLOYEE) – selects tuple whose salary is less than 10000 from EMPLOYEE relation.

2. PROJECT operation:
PROJECT operation selects certain columns from the table and discards the other columns. Greek letter7i(pi) is used to denote PROJECT operation. Syntax – πcondition(relation)
eg. πname, salary (EMPLOYEE) displays only the name and salary of all employees

3. UNION operation:
This operation returns a relation consisting of all tuples appearing in either or both of the two specified relations. It is denoted by ∪. duplicate tuples are eliminated. Union operation can take place between compatible relations only, i.e., the number and type of attributes in both the relations should be the same and also their order.
e.g. SCIENCE ∪ COMMERCE gives all the tuples in both COMMERCE and SCIENCE.

4. INTERSECTION operation:
This operation returns a relation consisting of all the tuples appearing in both of the specified relations. It is denoted by ∩. It can takes place only on compatible relations.
e.g. FOOTBALL ∩ CRICKET returns the players who are in both football and cricket teams.

Question 6.
Why should you choose a database system instead of simply storing data in conventional files?
Answer:
Advantages of DBMS over conventional files:

1. Data Redundancy – It means duplication of data. DBMS eliminates redundancy. DBMS does not store more than one copy of the same data.

2. Inconsistency can be avoided – If redundancy occurs there is a chance to inconsistency. If redundancy is removed then inconsistency cannot occur.

3. Efficient data access – It stored huge amount of data efficiently and can be retrieved whenever a need arise.

4. Data can be shared – The data stored in the database can be shared by the users or programs.

5. Standards can be enforced – The data in the database follows some standards.
Eg: a field ‘Name’ should have 40 characters long. Some standards are ANSI, ISO, etc.

6. Security restrictions can be applied – The data is of great value so it must be kept secure and private. Data security means the protection of data against accidental or intentional disclosure or unauthorized destruction or modification by unauthorized person.

7. Integrity can be maintained – It ensures that the data is to be entered in the database is correct.

8. Crash recovery – Some times all or a portion of the data is lost when a system crashes A good DBMS helps to recover data after the system crashed.

Question 7.
We have admission register, attendance register, marks register, etc. in our school to keep various details of students. Briefly describe how DBMS can replace these registers by stating any five merits.
Answer:
Advantages of DBMS
1. Data Redundancy – It means duplication of data. DBMS eliminates redundancy. DBMS does not store more than one copy of the same data.

2. Inconsistency can be avoided – If redundancy occurs there is a chance to inconsistency. If redundancy is removed then inconsistency cannot occur.

3. Data can be shared – The data stored in the database can be shared by the users or programs.

4. Standards can be enforced – The data in the database follows some standards.
Eg: a field ‘Name’ should have 40 characters long. Some standards are ANSI, ISO, etc.

5. Security restrictions can be applied – The data is of great value so it must be kept secure and private. Data security means the protection of data against accidental or intentional disclosure or unauthorized destruction or modification by unauthorized persons.

6. Integrity can be maintained – It ensures that the data is to be entered in the database is correct.

7. Efficient data access – It stored huge amount of data efficiently and can be retrieved whenever a need arise.

8. Crash recovery – Some times all or a portion of the data is lost when a system crashes. A good DBMS helps to recover data after the system crashed.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Students can Download Chapter 7 Web Hosting Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Plus Two Computer Science Web Hosting One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The companies that provide web hosting services are called ______.
Answer:
Web Hosts

Question 2.
The service of providing storage space in a web server to make a website available on Internet is called
Answer:
web hosting

Question 3.
Which of the following is true in the case of dedicated hosting?
(a) It shares server with other websites.
(b) It is usually inexpensive.
(c) It does not guarantee performance.
(d) It offers freedom for the clients to choose the hardware and the software.
Answer:
(d) only

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.
Choose the odd one out, and justify your answer.
(a) Shared hosting
(b) Dedicated hosting
(c) DNS
(d) Virtual Private Server
Answer:
(c) DNS others are types of web hosting.

Question 5.
______ is the service of providing storage space in a Webserver.

OR

Storing the web pages of a website in a server is popularly known as _____.
Answer:
Web hosting

Question 6.
The companies that provide web hosting services are called _______.
Answer:
Web hosts

Question 7.
Odd one out.
(a) Shared
(b) Dedicated
(c) VPS
(d) DNS
Answer:
(d) DNS means Domain Name System. The others are types of web hosting

Question 8.
VPS stands for _____ .
Answer:
Virtual Private Server.

Question 9.
From the following select the most commonly used web hosting.
(a) Shared
(b) Dedicated
(c) VPS
(d) DNS
Answer:
(a) Shared hosting

Question 10.
DNS stands for ____.
Answer:
Domain Name System

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 11.
‘A record’ means ______ .
Answer:
Address record

Question 12.
FTP stands for _____ .
Answer:
File Transfer Protocol.

Question 13.
Odd one out.
(a) Mozilla Firefox
(b) FileZilla
(c) CuteFTP
(d) SmartFTP
Answer:
(a) Mozilla Firefox, it is a web browser, the others are popular FTP client software

Question 14.
______ hosting provides web hosting services free of charge.
Answer:
Free hosting

Question 15.
Give an example for Free web hosting services with sub-domain website address.
Answer:
www.bvmhsskalparamba.facebook.com

Question 16.
Give an example for Free web hosting services with directory service website address.
Answer:
www.facebook.com/bvmhsSkalparamba

Question 17.
CMS stands for ____.
Answer:
Content Management System

Question 18.
The term ‘responsive web designing’ was introduced by _____.
Answer:
Ethan Marcotte

Question 19.
The method of Flexible designing of web pages to suit the various types of screens is called _____.
Answer:
Responsive web design method

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 20.
In dedicated hosting, if the client is allowed to place his own purchased web server in the service provider’s facility, then it is called _______.
Answer:
Co-location

Question 21.
What are the information contained in a ICANN database?
Answer:
Registered domain names/name, address, telephone number and e-mail address of the registrants.

Question 22.
What is‘A record’?
Answer:
‘A record’ is used to store the IP address and the corresponding domain name

Question 23.
Joomla is an example for ______ .
(a) CMS
(b) ISP
(c) DNS
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) CMS

Question 24.
The responsive web design feature that converts horizontal menu to a drop-down menu in mobile phones is called ______.
Answer:
Media queries

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 25.
The organization that maintains the WHOIS database of domain names is ______.
Answer:
ICANN

Plus Two Computer Science Web Hosting Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider that your school is planning to host a website. What are the factors that you will consider while choosing the type of web hosting?
Answer:
Following factors to be considered

  1. Buying sufficient amount of memory space for storing our website files
  2. If the web pages contain programming contents supporting technology must be considered
  3. Based upon the programs select Windows hosting or Linux hosting

Question 2.
Emmanuel wishes to buy a suitable domain for his company. Unfortunately, the domain name he chose is already registered by someone else. Name the feature that will help him to find the current owner. List the details will he get.
Answer:
WHOIS
Name, address, telephone number and e-mail address of the registrant

Question 3.
What is the use of FTP client software? Give an example.
Answer:
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) client software:
When a client requests a website by entering website address. Then FTP client software helps to establish a connection between client computer and remote server computer. Unauthorised access is denied by using user name and password hence secure our website files for that SSH(Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used.

Instead of http://, it uses ftp://. By using FTP client s/w we can transfer(upload) the files from our computer to the web server by using the ‘drag and drop’ method. The popular FTP client software are FileZilla, CuteFTP, SmartFTP, etc.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.
Haseena has decided to host her new website using free hosting facility; her friend Rinisha is against this move. Can you guess her argument against the utilization of free hosting facility?
Answer:
In free web hosting service, the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facilities such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia (audio and video) files.

Plus Two Computer Science Web Hosting Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Priya has developed a website for her shop. She has purchased a domain name and hosting space.

  1. Name the software that will help her to transfer her files from her computer to the webserver.
  2. List the requirements in that software that are necessary to connect to the webserver.

Answer:

  1. FTP software such as FileZilla, Cute FTP, Smart FTP
  2. Following are the requirements to connect to the Webserver
    • Domain name /IP address
    • User name.
    • Password

Question 2.
Explain the advantages of using SFTP protocol in FTP client software.
Answer:
Unauthorized access is denied by using username and password hence secure our website files, for this SSH (Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used. It encrypts and sends usernames, passwords, and data to the webserver.

Question 3.
Merin plans to create a website for their family without spending money.

  1. List some of the limitations that Merin will face regarding the hosting space for website.
  2. How will she provide a domain name for the website?

Answer:
1. In free web hosting service, the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facilities such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia (audio and video) files.

2. Usually, two types of free web hosting services as follows.

  • As a directory service: service provider’s website address/ our website address
    eg: www.facebook.com/bvmhsskalparamba
  • As a subdomain: Our website address. service providers website address
    eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.facebook.com

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.
Recently more and more people are using Content Management Systems (CMS) for developing professional websites. What can be the reasons for this?
Answer:
CMS means Content Management System. Do you heard about Data Base Management System (DBMS). DBMS is a software (collection of programs) used to create, alter, modify, delete and retrieve records of a DataBase. Similarly CMS is a collection of programs that is used to create, modify, update and publish website contents.

CMS can be downloaded freely and is useful to design and manage attractive and interactive websites with the help of templates that are available in CMS. WordPress, Joomla, etc. are the examples of CMS.

Question 5.
Suggest a hosting type for the following websites given below. Justify.

  1. Website for a medical shop in your city.
  2. Website for Public Service Commission (PSC) of Kerala.
  3. Website for an online shopping facility.

Answer:

  1. Shared hosting
  2. Dedicated/VPS
  3. Dedicated/VPS

Question 6.
Consider that a college in your locality plans to shift its website from shared type of hosting to VPS hosting. List the advantages that the website will gain from this change.
Answer:
Virtual Private Server (VPS):
A VPS is a virtual machine sold as a service by an Internet hosting Service. A VPS runs its own copy of an OS(Operating System) and customers have super level access to that OS instance, so they can install almost any s/ w that runs on that OS.

This type is suitable for websites that require more features than shared hosting but less features than dedicated hosting.
Eg: It is similar to owning a Condo

Question 7.
Mr. Mohan wants to host a personal website with minimal cost. Which type of web hosting would you advise for him? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Shared Hosting:
This type of hosting sharing re-sources, like memory, disk space, and CPU hence the name shared. Several websites share the same server. This is suitable for small websites that have less traffic and it is not suitable for large websites that have large bandwidth, large storage space and have large volume of traffic.

Eg: Shared hosting is very similar to living in an Apartment(Villas) complex. All residents are in the same location and must share the available resources(Car parking area, Swimming pool, Gymnasium, playground, etc) with everyone.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 8.
A supermarket in a city wishes to take its business online. It plans to accept orders for its products through a website and receive payments online.

  1. Which type of hosting is suitable for this website?
  2. Explain the reason for your choice.

Answer:
1. Dedicated Hosting

2. A web server and its resources are exclusively for one website that have large volume of traffic means large volume of requests by the visitors. Some Govt, departments or large organizations require uninterrupted services for that round the clock power supply is needed. It is too expensive but it is more reliable and provides good service to the public.

Eg: It is similar to living in an Our own house. All the resources in your house is only for you. No one else’s account resides on the computer and would not be capable of tapping into your resourses

Question 9.
Emil wishes to purchase the web hosting space required to host a website for his medical shop. List the features to be taken into consideration while buying hosting space on a web server.
Answer:
Following factors to be considered:

  1. Buying sufficient amount of memory space for storing our website files
  2. If the web pages contain programming contents supporting technology must be considered
  3. Based upon the programs select Windows hosting or Linux hosting

Question 10.
How can we connect a website hosted in a Web server to a domain name?
Answer:
Millions of websites are available over Internet so that our website must be registered with a suitable name. Domain Name registration is used to identify a website over Internet. A domain name must be unique(i.e. no two websites with same name is available).

So you have to check the availability of domain name before you register it, for this www.whois.net website will help. If the domain name entered is available then we can register it by paying the Annual registration fees online. Consider a Post Office, it has two addresses one string address (Irinjalakuda) and one numeric(pin) code (680121).

Just like this the website has also two addresses a string address, for example, www.agker.cag.gov.in and a numeric address (http:/ /210.212.239.70/). We are following string address, hence this domain name has to be connected to the corresponding IP address of the webserver. This is done by using ‘A record’(Address record) of the domain. ‘A record’ is used to store the IP address and the corresponding domain name.

Question 11.
What is the advantage of using SFTP protocol in FTP software?
Answer:
FTP(File Transfer Protocol) client software:
When a client requests a website by entering website address. Then FTP client software helps to establish a connection between client computer and remote server computer. Unauthorised access is denied by using username and password hence secure our website files for that SSH(Secure Shell) FTP simply SFTP is used.

Instead of http://, it uses ftp://. By using FTP client s/w we can transfer(upload) the files from our computer to the web server by using the ‘drag and drop’ method. The popular FTP client software are FileZilla, CuteFTP, SmartFTP, etc.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 12.
Raju wishes to host a website for his family. What are the advantages that free web hosting companies provide?
Answer:
The name implies it is free of cost service and the expense is meet by the advertisements. Some service providers allow limited facilities such as limited storage space, do not allow multimedia(audio and video) files. A paid service website’s address is as follows:
Eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.com

Usually two types of free web hosting services as follows:
1. As a directory service:
Service provider’s website address/ our website address.
eg: www.facebook.com / bvm hss kalparambu.

2. As a Sub domain:
Our website address.service providers website address.
eg: www.bvmhsskalparamba.facebook.com Earlier web hosting services are expensive but nowadays it is cheaper hence reduced the need for free web hosting.

Question 13.
What is CMS? What are the features of CMS? Give Examples.
Answer:
CMS means Content Management System. Do you heard about Data Base Management System (DBMS)? DBMS is a software(collection of programs) used to create, alter, modify, delete and retrieve records of a DataBase. Similarly, CMS is a collection of programs that is used to create, modify, update and publish website contents.

CMS can be downloaded freely and is useful to design and manage attractive and interactive websites with the help of templates that are available in CMS. WordPress, Joomla, etc. are examples of CMS.

Plus Two Computer Science Web Hosting Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain different types of web hosting?
Answer:
Types of web hosting:
Various types of web hosting services are available. We can choose the web hosting services according to our needs depends upon the storage space needed for hosting, the number of visitors expected to visit, etc.

1. Shared Hosting:
This type of hosting sharing resources, like memory, disk space, and CPU hence the name shared. Several websites share the same server. This is suitable for small websites that have less traffic and it is not suitable for large websites that have large bandwidth, large storage space and have large volume of traffic.

Eg: Shared hosting is very similar to living in an Apartment(Villas) complex. All residents are in the same location and must share the available resources(Car parking area, Swimming pool, Gymnasium, playground, etc) with everyone.

2. Dedicated Hosting:
A web server and its resources are exclusively for one website that have large volume of traffic means large volume of requests by the visitors. Some Govt, departments or large organizations require uninterrupted services for that round the clock power supply is needed. It is too expensive but it is more reliable and provides good service to the public.

Eg: It is similar to living in an Our own house. All the resources in your house is only for you. No one else’s account resides on the computer and would not be capable, of tapping into your resources.

3. Virtual Private Server (VPS):
A VPS is a virtual machine sold as a service by an Internet hosting Service. A VPS runs its own copy of an OS (Operating System) and customers have super level access to that OS instance, so they can install almost any s/what runs on that OS. This type is suitable for websites that require more features than shared hosting but less features than dedicated hosting.
Eg: It is similar to owning a Condo

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 2.

  1. What is responsive web design?
  2. Why is it gaining importance recently?

Answer:
1. The home page is displayed differently according to the screen size of the browser window (different screen sized devices mobile phone, palmtop, tablet, laptop, and desktop) we used. The website is designed dynamically (flexibly) that suit the screen size of different device introduced by Ethan Marcotte.

Before this, companies have to design different websites for different screen sized devices. By responsive web design, companies have to design only one website that suitably displayed according to the screen size of the devices. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries.

  • Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Media queries: There is an option (settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malaysia Manorama launched their responsive website.

2. Instead of using desktops or laptops many people nowadays visit websites using tablets and mobile phones. Portability is the main reason for this.

Question 3.
Today, we visit websites using tablets and mobile phones also. You might have noticed that the same website is displayed in a different layout in different devices.

  1. Name the concept used for this.
  2. List and explain the technologies used for implementing this concept

Answer:
1. Responsive web design.

2. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries:

  • Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Media queries: There is an option (settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malayala Manorama launched their responsive website.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Web Hosting

Question 4.

  1. What is responsive web design?
  2. How is responsive web design implemented?

Answer:
1. The home page is displayed differently according to the screen size of the browser window (different screen sized devices mobile phone, palm top, tablet, laptop and desktop) we used. The website is designed dynamically (flexibly) that suit the screen size of different device introduced by Ethan Marcotte.

Before this, companies have to design different websites for different screen sized devices. By responsive web design, companies have to design only one website that suitably displayed according to the screen size of the devices.

2. It is implemented by using flexible grid layout, images, and media queries:

  • Flexible grid layouts: It helps to set the size of the web page to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Flexible image and video: It helps to set the image or video dimension to fit the screen size of the device.
  • Media queries: There is an option (settings) to select the size of the web page to match our device, this can be done by using media queries inside the CSS file.

A well known Malayalam daily Malayala Manorama launched their responsive website.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Students can Download Chapter 2 Spread Sheet Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Plus Two Accountancy Spread Sheet One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The best way to get started in Libre Office calc is _____
Answer:
Application → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Question 2.
___________ is a configuration of rows and columns
Answer:
Spread sheet

Question 3.
A spread sheet is also known as ____________
(a) Work book
(b) Work area
(c) Work sheet
(d) Spread book
Answer:
(c) Work sheet

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 4.
____________ in spread sheet are horizontal vectors while ______ are vertical vectors
Answer:
Rows, columns

Question 5.
Spread sheet is used to
(a) Record data
(b) Calculate data
(c) Compare data
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 6.
Each cell value can either be an independent (basic) value or it may be derived on the basis of ____________.
Answer:
Arithmetic expression or a function.

Question 7.
A file in LibreOffice Calc is known as a ______
(a) Work sheet
(b) Page
(c) Work book
(d) All the above
Answer:
(c) Work book

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 8.
A work book is a collection of a number of ______
Answer:
Work Sheets

Question 9.
Where is the address of the active cell displayed?
(a) Row heading
(b) Status Bar
(c) Name Box
(d) Formula Bar
Answer:
(c) Name Box

Question 10.
Which command reverses the last action performed in the worksheet?
(a) Cut
(b) Undo
(c) Redo
(d) Paste
Answer:
(b) Undo

Question 11.
__________ is a text or special character or descriptive information for rows or columns.
Answer:
Label

Question 12.
A formula must starts with a ___________ sign
(a) =
(b) >
(c) *
(d) {}
Answer:
(a) =

Question 13.
_______ Function is commonly used to get the addition of various numbers orthe contents of various cells.
Answer:
Autosum (Σ)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 14.
The cell A5 indicate Column _______ and Row _____
Answer:
Column A & Row 5

Question 15.
The dark box which distinguishes the active cell is called _______
Answer:
Cell Pointer

Question 16.
One or more cells selected is called ______
Answer:
a range

Question 17.
Without the equal sign, the entry in a cell is treated as _________
(a) Text
(b) Label
(c) TextorLabel
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Text or Label

Question 18.
Libre Office calc has three type of cell entries, they are _______ , ______and _______
Answer:
Value, Label and Formula.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 19.
Which command allows you to reverse an undo command?
(a) Redo
(b) Repeat
(c) Reset
(d) Reverse
Answer:
(a) Redo

Question 20.
Which cell alignment is assigned to most values by default?
(a) Right
(b) Left
(c) Centre
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(b) Left

Question 21.
Which function automatically totals a column or row of Values?
(a) TOTAL
(b) ADD
(c) SUM
(d) AVG
Answer:
(c) SUM

Question 22.
Which Mathematical Operator is represented by an asterisk (*)
(a) Exponentiation (square)
(b) Addition
(c) Subtraction
(d) Multiplication
Answer:
(d) Multiplication

Question 23.
How many blank work sheets are shown when a new workbook is created?
(a) One
(b) Two
(c) Three
(d) Four
Answer:
(c) Three

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 24.
The cell co-ordinate in the formula are known as ………….
Answer:
cell references

Question 25.
IF function is …………….
Answer:
Logical function

Question 26.
The cell references for cell range of G2to M12 is …………….
(a) G2.M12
(b) G2: M12
(c) G2; M12
(d) G2 – M12
Answer:
(c) G2: M12

Question 27.
If 4/6 entered in a cell without applying any format, LibreOffice Calc will treat this as
(a) Fraction
(b) Number
(c) Text
(d) Date
Answer:
(d) Date

Question 28.
The cell labelled F5 refers to …………….
(a) Row F column 5
(b) Column F row 5
(c) Function available in cells
(d) Function key F5
Answer:
(b) Column F row 5

Question 29.
LibreOffice Calc is a FOSS. What is FOSS?
Answer:
Free and Open Source Software.

Question 30.
Which among the following is not a spreadsheet software.
(a) MS Office Excel
(b) Open Office Spredsheet
(c) Libre Office Calc
(d) MS Office Word
Answer:
(d) M S Office Word

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 31.
How many worksheets can be made as active worksheet at a time?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(a) 1

Question 32.
The name of the worksheet will be shown in the ______ at the bottom left of the windows.
Answer:
Sheet Tab

Question 33.
To add column in a worksheet, click __________, there we get an option to add column.
Answer:
Column Header

Question 34.
A ………… is identified by a combination of a column header (letter) and a row header (number)
Answer:
cell

Question 35.
_______ is a group of adjacent cells that forms a rectangular area.
Answer:
Range

Question 36.
Which among the following is used as the range operator
(a) ;
(b) :
(c) /
(d) #
Answer:
(b) :

Question 37.
One ENTER key stroke means
(a) One cell down
(b) One cell up
(c) One cell right
(d) One cell left
Answer:
(a) One cell down

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 38.
………………. Function counts the number of cells which contain any value.
(COUNT, COUNTA, COUNT BLANK, COUNTIF)
Answer:
COUNTA

Plus Two Accountancy Spread Sheet Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following

AB
1. Rows1. Intersection of a row & a column
2. Columns2. Numerical numbers from top to bottom
3. Cell3. Unique identification code of a cell
4. Cell address4. Alpha characters from left to right

Answer:

AB
1. Rows1. Numerical numbers from top to bottom
2. Columns2. Alpha characters from left to right
3. Cell3. Intersection of a row & a column
4. Cell address4. Unique identification code of a cell

Question 2.
What do you mean by spreadsheet?
Answer:
Spreadsheet:
Spreadsheet application is a computer program that allows to record, calculate and compare numerical or financial data. Using a spreadsheet program. We can store a lot of data in the worksheet and also arrange and analyse the data by using different functions and formulae for the meaningful object.

It is used to establish relationship between two or more sets of data. Libre Office Calc, MS Office Excel, Open Office Spreadsheet etc. are examples of spreadsheet software.

Question 3.
Give a short note on

  1. Work book
  2. Work sheet

Answer:
1. Workbook:
A file in spread sheet is known as a workbook. A work book is a collection of a number of work sheets.

2. Work sheets:
The work area which consists of rows and columns in a spreadsheet is called a worksheet. By default three work sheets-sheet 1, sheet -2, sheet -3 are available in work book.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 4.
Explain about rows and columns in Libre Office Calc?
Answer:
1. Rows:
Rows are the horizontal vectors in the worksheet. These are numbered numerically from Top to Bottom.

2. Columns:
Columns are vertical vectors in the worksheet. These are referred by alpha characters from left to right such as A, B, C, …, AA, AB, AC …etc.

Question 5.
What do you mean be Relative cell Reference?
Answer:
1. Relative Cell references:
By default cell reference is relative; which means that as a formula or function is copied and pasted to other cells, the cell references in the formula or function change to reflect the new location.

Question 6.
Define the following

  1. Label
  2. Formula

Answer:
1. Labels:
Descriptive information for rows or columns in the form of a text or a special character is called Label.
Eg: Name, Roll No, Address.

2. Formula:
The formula means a mathematical calculation on a set of cells. The formula must start with an = (equal to) sign. When a cell contains a formula, it often contains reference to other cells. Eg:= Basic pay + DA + HRA

Question 7.
List down any two features fo Spreadsheet.
Answer:

  • A spreadsheet is a configuration of rows and columns.
  • A spreadsheet is also known as worksheet.

Question 8.
Name the different spreadsheet software available.
Answer:
LibreOffice Calc, MS Office Excel, Open Office Spreadsheet.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 9.
Briefly explain any two Date and Time functions availabe in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:
1. TODAY():
It is the function for today’s date in the worksheet. This helps to update the date value when we reopen the spreadsheet or modify the values of the document
Syntax: =TODAY()

2. NOW ():
It is the function for today’s date and present time. This helps to update the date and the time value when the cell value is modified.
Syntax: =NOW()

Question 10.
Give the Syntax for

  1. YEAR()
  2. DATE()

Answer:
1. YEAR()
Syntax: = YEAR (Date value) OR = YEAR (“Date”)

2. DATE()
Syntax: = DATE (Year, Month, Day)

Question 11.
Complete the table by using ROUNDUP()
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 1
Answer:

  1. 1880
  2. 1900

Question 12.
What are the Text Manipulation Function in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:

  • TEXT
  • CONCATENATE

Question 13.
Give the explanation of the following errors
Error Message

  1. # DIV/o!
  2. VALUE!

Answer:

  1. # DIV/0! → When a number is divided by zero
  2. VALUE! → When a wrong argument is given in a fromula

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 14.
Spot the correct pairs by observing the nature of software, and give justification
(a) Microsoft Excel and LibreOffice Calc
(b) Linux and Tata Ex.
(c) Windows and MS Office
(d) GINUGhata and Microsoft Access
Answer:
(a) Microsoft Excel and LibreOffice Calc. Both are spread sheet packages.

Plus Two Accountancy Spread Sheet Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are the advantage of Libre Office Calc?
Answer:

  1. It is both free software and open source software.
  2. It can be used to calculate, analyse and manage data.
  3. Libre Office Calc is available for a variety of platforms including Linux, OSX, Microsoft windows and Free BSD.

Question 2.
Give the cell address or range reference in the following situations.

  1. Cell at 10th column and 6th row.
  2. Cell at 27th column and 15th row.
  3. Range starting from 5th column, 9throw and spread till 12th column and 15th row.

Answer:

  1. Cell at 10th column and 6th row = J6.
  2. Cell at 27th column and 15th row = AA15.
  3. Range starting from 5th column, 9th row and spread till 12th column and 15th row = E9: L15.

Question 3.

  1. What is FOSS?
  2. What are the benefits of using FOSS?

Answer:

  1. FOSS means Free and Open Source Software
  2. The benefits of using FOSS:
    • Decreased software costs.
    • Increased Security and stability.
    • Any one can use, copy, study and change the software in any manner.
    • Source code is openly shared.

Question 4.
How can we save Libre Office Calc file?
Answer:
Step 1: Go to the File menu
File menu

Step 2: Click on Save
Save

OR

Step 1: & Step 2 – Press Ctrl + S
Ctrl + S

Step 3: Type the file in the name field instead of default name Untitled 1
Name field

Step 4: Choose the place where we want to save the new file.

Step 5: Click on Save

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 5.
Write the steps to be followed to

  1. Rename a worksheet
  2. Delete a worksheet
  3. Copy a worksheet

Answer:
1. Rename a worksheet:
Step – 1 Select the work sheet in the Sheet Tab which we want to Rename.

Step – 2 Right click and select Rename sheet from the drop up menu

Step – 3 Type new name in the Name field and press OK button

2. Delete a worksheet:
Step – 1 Select the worksheet in the Sheet Tab which we want to delete

Step – 2 Right click and select Delete sheet from the drop up menu

Step – 3 Click on Yes to the conformation question.

3. Copy a worksheet:
Step – 1 Click on blank rectangle Top left corner of the worksheet (Range Adress A1: AM J1048576)

Step – 2 Move the curser inside the worksheet and Right click the mouse.

Step – 3 Click on Copy from the dropdown menu.

Step – 4 Open the worksheet where we want to copy the sheet

Step – 5 Right click on cell A1. Click on Paste.

Question 6.
Give the cell address or range reference in the following situations.

  1. Cell of 10th column and 9th row
  2. Range starting from 2nd column 4th row and spread till 8th column 12th row
  3. Range starting from 4th column 5th row and spread till 10thcolumn 15th row

Answer:

  1. J9
  2. B4: H12
  3. D5: J15

Question 7.
What is the purpose of the COUNTIF function?
Answer:
COUNTIF():
This function counts the number of cells within a given that meet the criteria or condition.
Syntax: = COUNTIF (Range, Criteria)

Question 8.
Write the command to calculate the State Life Insurance Premium (SLI) of an employee using IF Function. The condition is SLI Premium Rs. 500/-below Basic Pay (BP) of Rs. 15000/- and for others Rs. 800/- (BP is given in cell C3)
Answer:
= IF(C3 < 15000, 500, 800)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 9.
4 numbers are entered in Libre Office Calc spreadsheet starting from cell A1 to A4. Write any two formulae for getting total of those numbers in the cell A5

Answer:

  1. A5 = A1 + A2 + A3 + A4
  2. A5 = Σ(A1 : A4)

Question 10.
For preparation of Payslip of an employee, Govind entered Basic Pay in cell B2 of a worksheet in LibreOffice calc. The D.A. is 76% of Basic Pay and Gross Salary is the sum of Basic Pay and DA. In order to calculate the amount of DA in cell C2 and Gross salary in cell D2, what entries are to be made?
Answer:
Basic Pay → B2
DA → C2
Gross salary → D2
C2 = B2 * 76%
D2 = B2 + C2

Question 11.
Consider the following features of a software tool. Identify the software.

  1. It can be used as a text editor
  2. List out the important uses of this software

Answer:

  1. LibreOffice calc has the above mentioned features.
  2. Importance of LibreOffice calc.
    • It can be used for the preparation of statement of depreciation.
    • It can be used for preparation of Payroll of employees.
    • It can be used for the preparation of the loan re-payment schedule.

Question 12.
Complete the following.

  1. One cell down → arrow key
  2. One cell up → …………………………
  3. One cell left → …………………………
  4. One cell right → ………………………

Answer:

2. Up arrow key
3. Left arrow key
4. Right arrow key

Question 13.
Can you give some key navigations and short cut in LibreOffice calc?
Answer:
Spreadsheet navigation:
We can move around a worksheet through four arrow keys

  1. Left-arrow key
  2. Right arrow key
  3. Up arrow key
  4. Down arrow key

The mouse can also be used for navigation in a spreadsheet except for data entry. Some common operations/navigations are listed below:

MovementKeystroke (Press Key)
One cell upUp arrow key/ Shift + Enter key
One cell downDown arrow key/ Enter key
One cell rightRight arrow key/ Tab key
One cell leftLeft arrow key / Shift + Tab key
Top of sheet (Cell A1)Ctrl + Home Key
Move to last cell containing dataCtrl + End Key
Move to beginning of the RowHome Key or Ctrl + Left arrow key
Move to last filled cell in columnEnd key

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 14.
What commands are used to insert a column and delete a column in LibreOffice Calc?
Answer:
1. To insert a column:
To insert a column click a cell in the column immediately to the right of where you want to insert the new column. Then on the Insert menu, click Columns.

2. To delete a column:
Select the column you want to delete. On the Edit menu, click Delete.

Question 15.
Give the procedure to insert a new worksheet and to delete a worksheet.
Answer:
To insert a new worksheet, right click the worksheet, select ‘insert’. To delete a worksheet, select the sheet you want to delete and ‘click delete sheet’ on the edit menu.

Question 16.
Give the cell address or range reference in the following situations.

  1. Cell at 12th Column and 8th row.
  2. Range starting from 6th Column 10th row and spread till 12th Column and 16th row.

Answer:

  1. L8.
  2. F10: L16

Question 17.
Name the appropriate Statistical functions.

  1. Number of cells contain numbers.
  2. Number of cells contain any value.
  3. Number of empty cell.
  4. Number of cells that meet the given criteria.

Answer:

  1. COUNT
  2. COUNTA
  3. COUNTBLANK
  4. COUNTIF

Question 18.
What is the use of financial function ACCRINT in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:
ACCRINT ():
This function returns the accrued interest for a security that pays periodic interest.
Syntax: = ACCRINT(Issue, First_Interest, settlement, rate, Par, frequency, basis, calc_method)

Question 19.
Explain the difference between relative cell reference and absolute cell reference?
Answer:
1. Relative Cell references:
By default cell reference is relative; which means that as a formula or function is copied and pasted to other cells, the cell references in the formula or function change to reflect the new location.

2. Absolute Cell reference:
The absolute cell reference consists of the column letter and row number surrounded by dollar ($) signs. Eg $A$5. An absolute cell reference is used when we want a cell reference to stay fixed on a specific cell.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 20.
What is the use of PIVOT TABLE?
Answer:
Preparation of reports using Pivot Tables:
A Pivot Table is a way to present information in a report format. A Pivot Table report provides enhanced layout, attractive and formatted report with improved readability. There are two types of data table.

  1. One-Variable Data Table (One – Variable )
  2. Two-Variable Data Table (Two-Variable)
    • The one variable Data Table allows us to identify a single decision variable in our model and see how changing the values for that variable affects the values calculated by one or more formulas in our model.
    • The two variable Data table allows us to specify two decision variables and a variety of inputs and only a single formula.

Plus Two Accountancy Spread Sheet Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Define the following

  1. Cell
  2. Range
  3. Worksheet
  4. Workbook

Answer:
1. Cell:
The intersection of a row and a column is called a cell. A cell is identified by a combination of an alpha – numeric character eg: A1, B6, C10, etc. This alpha numeric character is called cell address. Hence each cell has a unique address.

2. Ranges:
Range is a group of adjacent cells that forms a rectangular area. A range is specified by giving the address for first cell in range and the last cell in the rage, eg: range starting from A10 to A20 is written as A10: A20 where colon (:) is the range operator.

3. Work sheets:
The work area which consists of rows and columns in a spreadsheet is called worksheet. By default three worksheets-sheet 1, sheet -2, sheet -3 are available in work book.

4. Workbook:
A file in spread sheet is known as a workbook. A work book is a collection of a number of work sheets.

Question 2.
What are the different spreadsheet reference functions in Libre Office Calc?
Answer:
Spreadsheet Reference Functions:
The important spreadsheet reference functions are

1. LOOKUP () functions:
The LOOKUP function returns a value either from a one-row or one-column range or from an array. The lookup function has two syntax forms: Vector form and Array form.

The vector form of LOOUP looks in a one-row or one column range (known as a vector) for a value, and then returns a value from the same position in a second one-row or one-column range.

The array form of LOOKUP looks in the first row or column of an array for the specified value, and then returns a value from the same position in the last row or column of the array.

LOOKUP (Vector from)
Syntax: = LOOKUP (search criterion, Search vector, Result vector)
LOOKUP (Array form)
Syntax: =(LOOKUP (lookup_value, array)

2. VLOOK UP ():
VLOOK UP is the vertical LOOKUP function. Use VLOOK UP to search the first column (columns are vertical) of a block of data and return the value from another column in the same row.
Syntax: = VLOOKUP (Search criterion; Array; Index; Sort Order)

3. HLOOKUP ( ):
It is the Horizontal LOOKUP function, searches for a value in the first row of a table array and returns the corresponding value in the same column from another row of the same table array.
Syntax: HLOOKUP (search criteria; index; sorted)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 3.
Give the cell address or range reference in the following situations.

  1. Cell at 10th Column and 9th row.
  2. Range starting from 2nd Column 4th row and spread till 8th Column and 12th row.

Answer:

  1. J9.
  2. B4: H12

Question 4.
What are the logical functions in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:
Logical Functions:
Logical functions are used for comparison and checking a test condition. The major logical functions are IF, AND and OR.

Question 5.
Explain the steps involved to insert a new work sheet in LibreOffice Calc
Answer:
Steps involved to insert a new work sheet in LibreOffice Calc.
Step 1 – Click on the [+] button in the sheet Tab

OR

Step 1 – Click on the work sheet in the sheet Tab Sheet Tab

Step 2 – Right click the mouse

Step – 3 Select insert sheet from the Drop up menu box
Drop up

Step 4- Add number of sheets and give name, press
OK

Question 6.
You are required to prepare a rank list for admission to the B.Com course. The Index mark is calculated as follows.
Sum of mark secured in Plus 2, Mark obtained in Accountancy and -25% of Mark obtained in Business studies. Give the entries in Libre Office Calc to get the index mark.
Answer:

  • A1 → Total Mark
  • B1 → Mark in Accountancy
  • C1 → Mark in Business Studies
  • D1 → Index Mark
  • A2 → Enter the Marks
  • B2 → Enter the Marks
  • C2 → Enter the Marks
  • D2 → =A2 + B2 + (C2 * 25%)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 7.
Match the following:

AB
1. One cell to the left1. Right arrow key
2. To cell A12. Ctrl + End
3. One cell to the right3. Ctrl + Home
4. To the last cell in the worksheet that contains data4. Shift + Tab

Answer:

AB
1. One cell to the left1. Shift + Tab
2. To cell A12. Ctrl + Home
3. One cell to the right3. Right arrow key
4. To the last cell in the work sheet that contains data4. Ctrl + End

Question 8.
The monthly sales of a company for the first six months are given below:

AB
1. January25000
2. February15000
3. March28000
4. April32000
5. May20000
6. June30000
  1. Find the total sales for the six months
  2. Find the average sales of the six months
  3. Find the lowest sales of the six months
  4. Find the highest sales of the six months

Answer:

AB
7. Total sales= SUM (B1:B6)
8. Average sales= Average (B1:B6)
9. Lowest sales= MIN (B1:B6)
10. Highest sales= MAX(B1:B6)

Question 9.
Give the range reference in the following cases.

  1. Range beginning from 1st column, 1st row and ending 16th column, 8th row
  2. Range beginning from 5th column, 7th Row and ending 27th column, 37th row

Answer:

  1. A1: P8
  2. E7: AA37

Question 10.
Match the following:

AB
a) Todaya) Today’s date & Time
b) Nowb) Convert date into corresponding value
c) Dayc) Today’s date
d) Date valued) Day of the data referred in the formula

Answer:

AB
a) Todaya) Today’s date
b) Nowb) Today’s date & time
c) Dayc) Day of the date referred in the formula
d) Date valued) Convert date into corresponding value

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 11.
Give the cell address or range reference in the following situations

  1. Cell at 8th column and 10th row
  2. Cell at 27th column and 6th row
  3. Range starting from 5th column, 9th row and spread till 12th column and 15th row

Answer:

  1. H10
  2. AA6
  3. E9: L15

Question 12.
What are the steps to be followed for naming cells and ranges.
Answer:
Step 1 – Select the cells or ranges that are to be named.

Step 2 – Select Define Range from the Data menu Data.

Step 3 – This will display a dialogue box us “Define Database Range”. It will provide a place to enter “Name”.

Step 4 – Click OK on the dialogue box.

Plus Two Accountancy Spread Sheet Practical Lab Work Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The following marks are obtained by 8 students in an examination.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 2
Ascertain the grade obtained by students based on the following criteria
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 3
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open Libre Office Cal work sheet
Applications → Office → Libre Office calc

Step 2 – Enter the data in the given cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 4
Step 3 – Enter the following formula in cell D2
= IF(C2 < 30, “FAIL”, IF(C2 < 40, “D+”, IF(C2 < 50, “C”, IF(C2<60, “C+”, IF(C2 < 70, “B”, IF (C2 < 80, “B+”, IF(C2 < 90, “A”, IF(C2 < 100, “A+”))))))))

Step 4 – Drag the formula to D9
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 5

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 2.
The sales made by 6 salesmen during three months are given below. You are required to prepare a statement showing the total sales of each salesman and total sales of the firm.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 6
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice calc worksheet
Applications → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following data in the given cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 7
Step 3 – Enter the given formula in cell E2 = B2 + C2 + D2

Step 4 – Drag the formula to E7 to get the total sales of each salesman

Step 5 – Enter the given formula in cell E8 to get the total sales of the firm = SUM (E2: E7)
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 8

Question 3.
The monthly production of a company are given below

MonthProduction (Units)
January25000
February20000
March22000
April18000
May19000
June24000

 

  1. Find the total production for the six months
  2. Find the average production of the six months
  3. Find the number of months during the period
  4. Find the lowest production of the six months
  5. Find the highest production of the six months

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Applications → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following data in the given cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 9

Step 3 – Enter the following formula in the given cells

B8 = SUM (B2:B7)
B9       = AVERAGE(B2: B7)
B10     = COUNT (B2:B7)
B11= MIN (B2:B7)
B 12= MAX (B2:B7)

Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 10

Question 4.
For the recruitment of managers in different departments of a company, Applicant’s age should be greater than 35 and less than 45 as on 31/03/2018. Write the Spreadsheet statement to test when a candidate is eligible for recruitment or not, when his/ her date of birth is entered in a cell as input
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc Spread sheet.
Applications → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the given data in the following cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 11
Step 3 – Enter the date of birth in cell B2

Step 4 – Enter the following formula in cell B3 = Round ((B1-B2)/365,0). Then the age will display in the cell B3.

Step 5 – Enter the following formula in cell B4 to test the eligibility of the candidate = IF(B3<35, “Not eligible”, IF(B3>45, “Not eligible”, “Eligible”)

OR

= IF (AND (B>34, B3<46), “Eligible”, “Not eligible”)
Note: The data value entered in cell B2 and B3 are to be formatted as “Date”

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 5.
The given table shows name of employees, Designation and monthly salary paid for different employees in Jose Traders.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 12
Find out the following:

  1. The total monthly salary by naming range (TOTAL SALARY)
  2. The total monthly salary paid to marketing managers (MM) in the firm
  3. The name of employees with a monthly salary of Rs.30000 by using LOOK UP function.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Applications → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the data in the appropriate cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 13
Step 3 – Naming a range
Select the range which shows monthly salary ie C2: C7 click on “Data” from the menu bar. Select “Define Range” Type the name “TOTAL_SALARY” in the name box and press OK or Enter key

Select the Range (C2: C7) → Data → Define Ranges Type TOTAL_SALARY. Press OK/Enter Key

Step 4 – Enter the following formulas in respective cells .

B8= SUM (TOTAL_SALARY)
B9        = SUMIF(B2:B7, “MM”, C2:C7)
B10             = LOOKUP(30000, C2:C7, A2:A7)

Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 14

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 6.
The following Data is given in the form of a Table.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 15

  • How many cells contain numbers only?
  • How many cells contain any value?
  • Count the number of cells containing the value exceeding 500.
  • How many blank cells are there in the table?

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc
Applications → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2- Enter the given details in appropriate cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 16
Step 3 – Enter the given details and formula in the Following cells.

Step 3 – Enter the given details and formula in the
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 17
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 18

Question 7.
The following details are given
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 19
Find out

  • Find the name of student whose admission number is 8267
  • Look up value 8136 and locate the fee paid status by using VLOOKUP
  • Look up the name of student against admission number 8124
  • Ad. No. of student who paid fee Rs. 580

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the details in the given cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 20
Step 3 – Enter the given details and formula in the following cells

A
8Name of student Ad.No.8267
9Fee paid status of Ad No.8136
10Name of student Ad. No.8124
11Ad.No. of student, paid Rs.580
B
8= LOOKUP(8267,A2:A7,B2:B7)
9= VLOOKUP(8136,A2:C7,3,0)
10= LOOKUP(8124,A2:A7,B2:B7)
11= VLOOKUP (8370,A2:C7,3,0)

Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet practical mark q7 img 5

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 8.
The marks in Accountancy of some students are given below.

NameMark
Priya89
Indira-ab-
Sindhu56
Reny64
Beena49
Bindhu50
Resmi-ab-

Calculate:

  1. Number of students in the class
  2. Number of students appeared in the Accountancy examination
  3. Total marks in Accountancy examination
  4. Average Marks in Accountancy examination
  5. Lowest mark in Accountancy
  6. Highest mark in Accountancy

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc Work sheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the given data in appropriate cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 21

Step 3 – Enter the following details and formula in the given cells


Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 23

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 9.
Mark summary of some students are given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 24
Calculate

  1. Number of cells containing 90 marks
  2. Count the number of paper scored less than 40
  3. Find the result of each student. (Pass or Fail) minimum mark required to pass is 30

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice calc

Step 2 – Enter the given data in appropriate cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 25

Step3 – Enter the following details and formula in appropriate cells

A8Number of cells containing 90 mark
B8= COUNTIF(B2: G7, “90”)
A9Count the number of paper scored less than 40 Mark
B9= COUNTIF(B2: G7, “40”)

Step4 – Find the result of the student

1ststep – Count the number of marks less than 30 scored by each student For this,
Enter the formula in H2 =COUNT IF (B2: G2, “<30”)
Drag the equation to H7

2nd step – Based on the result in H2: H7 range, we can find out the result in I2 cell by giving the following formula
=IF(H2 = 0, “PASS”, “FAIL”)
Drag (Copy) the formula to I7
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 26

Question 10.
List of debtors and creditors, and the amount due from them are given below
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 27
Calculate the total amount of receivables and payables using SUMIF functions.
Procedure:
Step -1 Open Libre Office Calc worksheet
Applications → Office → LibreOffice calc

Step 2 – Enter the details in the given cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 28
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 29

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 11.
Calculate Income Tax of following employees based on the following criteria.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 30
Conditions

  1. Tax rate is 40% of Total taxable Income.
  2. For male, standard deduction is 150,000 3 For female, if taxable income is less than or equal to Rs.4,00,000, then the standard deduction is 2,00,000, otherwise 1,50,000

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice calc

Step 2 – Enter the given details in the given range
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 31

Step 3 – Calculation of Tax
Enter the formula in D2 cell and drag with the fill handle up to D8
= IF(B2 = “Male”, (C2 – 150000)*40%, IF (AND(C2 = “Female”, C2 <= 400000), (C2 – 200000)*40%, (C2 – 150000)*40%))
Output:

Name of EmployeeTax
Manoj60,000
Praveena1,20,000
Naveen2,20,000
Riya2,08,000
Rohit1,40,000
Latha80,000
Arya2,84,000

Question 12.
For SI selection in Kerala polices there is a physical test, which consists of three items. A candidate has to qualify ANY ONE of the three tests to qualify for the final. The standard for the physical test is given below.

  • Shot put: 5 meters or above.
  • Ball throws 50 meters.
  • 500-meter race within 5 minutes.

The following data is furnished:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 32
Check whether the candidates quality or not.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice calc

Step 2 – Enter the details in the form of a Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 33
Step 3 – Enter the following formula in F2 and drag with fill up to F6 = IF(OR(C2>=5, D2>=50, E2<=5), ‘‘Qualified”, “Not Qualified”)
Output:

Chest No.Result
203Qualified
216Qualified
275Qualified
304Not Qualified
361Qualified

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 13.
Calculate DAY, MONTH and YEAR of 36525 Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Calc worksheet.

Step 2 – Enter the details in appropriate cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 34
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 35

Question 14. Calculate the Date value of 28/10/1978/
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice calc work sheet
Application → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step-2 – Enter the given details in Cell A1 = DATEVALUE (“28/10/1978”)
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 36

Question 15.
Find the age of Resi Jos based on her date of birth and today’s date Date of birth 06-05-1981.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open Libre office Calc work sheet Application officer LibreOffice calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in appropriate cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 37
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 38

Question 16.
Below is given the table showing the name, department, and salary paid for different employees
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 39

  • Find number of employees in the firm.
  • Find number of employees in Production Department.
  • Find the total monthly salary paid in Purchase Department.
  • Find the total monthly salary paid in Finance Department.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank work sheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details as given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 40
Step 3 – Enter the following text in different cells as given below.

CellText
A9No. of employees in the firm
A10No. of employees in the production department
A11Total monthly salary paid in purchase depart­ment
A12Total monthly salary paid in finance depart­ment

Step 4 – Enter the following formula in different cells as given below.

CellFormula
B9= COUNTA(A2: A8)
B10= COUNTIF(B2: B8, “Production”)
B11= SUMIF (B2: B8, “Purchase”, C2: C8)
B12= SUMIF (B2: B8, “Finance”, C2: C8)

Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 41

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 17.
Below is given the table showing the Name, Department, and Salary paid for different employees.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 42

  • Name the employee name column as “Emp Name”, Department column as “Dept” and monthly salary column as “Salary”.
  • Find the total monthly salary.

procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 43
Step 3 – Select the range A2: A6, From the Data tool menu, select “Define Range” and – give name as “ Emp Name” and click (OK) button.

Step 4 – Select the range B2: B6, From the Data tool menu, select “Define Range” and give name as “Dept” and click (OK) button.

Step 5 – Select the range C2: C6, From the Data tool menu, select “Define Range” and give name as “Salary” and click (OK) button.

Step 6 – Enter the following formula to find out the total monthly salary.

CellText / Formula
A 7          Total Monthly Salary
B 7= SUM (Salary)

Output:

Total Monthly Salary12500

Question 18.
Below is given the table showing the Name, Class, and Fees due to different students.

  • Find out the total fees due from the students.
  • Find the average amount of fees
  • Find the highest amount of fees
  • Find the lowest amount of fees

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 44
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the worksheet as follows.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 45
Step 3 – Enter the following text in respective cells.

CellText
A9Total Fees due
A10Average Fees
A11Highest amount of fees
A12Lowest amount of fees

Step 4 – Enter the following formula in respective cells

CellFormula
B9= SUM (D2: D8)
B10      = Average (D2: D8)
B11= Max (D2;D8)
B12= Min (D2: D8)

Output:

Total Fees Due2700
Average Fees386
Highest Amount of Fees625
Lowest Amount of Fees60

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 19.
From the given values, calculate the following:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 46

  • Find the number of values
  • Find the total sum of the values
  • Find the average
  • Find the largest value
  • Find the smallest value

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the values in the work sheet as follows.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 47
Step 3 – Enter the following text in the respective cells.

CellText
A8             Number of values
A9              Sum of the values
A10Average
AH        Largest value
A12        Smallest value

Step 4 – Enter the following formula in the respective cells.

CellFormula
B8      = COUNT (A1: A7)
B9= SUM(A1: A7)
B10       = AVERAGE/A1: A7)
B11= MAX/A1: A7)
B12= MIN(A1: A7)

Output:

Number of values7
Sum of the values3000
Average429
Largest value700
Smallest value200

Question 20.
Prepare a statement showing advance tax collected form the employees @ 10% of the yearly salary from those who receive Rs. 500000 or more.

EmployeesYearly salary
Fijo855000
Joshy650000
Roby720000
Bose425000
Prince570000
Binoy380000

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LiberOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 48
Step 3 – Select the range A2: A7, From Data Tools menu, select ‘Name a Range’ and give name as “Employees” and click (OK) button.

Step 4 – Enter the text /formula in the following cells.

C
1Advance Tax
2= IF (B2>=500000, B2*10%, 0)
3
4
5
6
7

Step 5 – Copy formula to C3: C7 to the last employee.

Step 6 – Enter “Total Advance Tax” in cell B8 and enter the formula ‘‘SUM C2: C7” to get total amount.
Output:

Fijo85500
Joshy65000
Roby72000
Prince57000

Question 21.
Mrs. Leela, the class teacher is analysing the performance of her students in a class test.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 49
Find out

  • Total number of students
  • Number of students appeared in the class test
  • Number of students with no grade
  • Number of A+ holders
  • Number of B grade holders.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LiberOfficeCalc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 50
Step 3 – Enter the text /formula in the corresponding
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 51
Output:

Total number of students8
Students appeared in-class test6
Students with no grade2
Number of A+ holders2
Number of B grade holders1

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 22.
The monthly sales effected by 6 salesmen are given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 52
Calculate the commission earned by each salesman on the basis of the following rules.

Total salesCommission
Less than 8000Nil
8000- 100005%
10000- 120008%
More than 1200010%

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 53
Step 3 – Enter the formula = SUM (B2: D2) in cell E2 to get the total sales. Copy the formula to the last employee.

Step 4 – Enter the formula = IF (E2 >= 12000, E2 * 10%, IF (E2 >= 10000, E2*8%, IF(E2 >= 8000, E2 * 5%,0)))
Copy the formula to the last employee.
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 54

Question 23.
ABC Ltd categorises their salesmen into four on the basis of sales targets achieved in each quarter. The criteria and sales are given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 55
Performance criteria
Total sales – Grade
More than 100000 – Excellent
50000-100000 – Good
30000-50000 – Average
Less than 30000 – Bad
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 56
Step 3 – Enter the formula in E2 to get total sales = SUM (B2: D2)
Copy the formula to the last employee.

Step 4 – Enter the formula in F2 to get the commission = IF(E2 >= 100000, “EXCELLENT”, IF (E2 >= 50000, “GOOD”, IF (E2 >= 30000, “AVERAGE”, “BAD”)))
Copy the formula to the last employee.
Output:

RameshBAD
SureshGOOD
MaheshAVERAGE
RajeshGOOD
SukeshGOOD

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 24.
Below is given the name and address of some students. Combine and show details in an address format using CONCATENATE function.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 57
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LiberOffice Calc
Application → Office → LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in appropriate cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 58
Step 3 – Enter the following formula in F2 cell = CONCATENATE (A2, “ ”, B2, “ ”, C2, “ ”, D2, “ ”, E2)

Step – 4 Copy down the formula up to the row of the last employee.
Output:

Address
Sanjan Kollannur Kechery 680579.
Shaji Amala Bhavan Ollur 680514 Thrissur.
Nithin MRA/258 Mannuthy 680007 Ernakulam.

Question 25.
Mr Venugoapl is planning to invest Rs. 10000 in the beginning of each year in an annual investment scheme. The interest rate is 8% and the term of the scheme is 10 years. Using FV function, find out how much amount he will get at the expiry of the scheme.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LiberOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the given detials and formula in diffemt cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 59
Output:

Future value156454.87

Question 26.
Anakha Ltd. wants to select one machinery, out of the two alternatives available on the basis of net present value. The cost and inflows of these machineries are given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 60
Assuming annual interest rate of 10%, find out net present values of these two machineries.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank work sheet in LiberOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 61
Step 3 – Enter the formula = NPV (10%, C2:F2) – B2 in G2 to get the net present value of semi automatic machinery.
Copy the formula to G3
Output:

MachineryNPV
Semi-Automatic4683.42
Fully Automatic52891.2

Question 27.
Calculate Net Present Value (NPV) from the following data

Cost of Machinery2000000
Cash inflows -1 year60000
Cash inflows – II year80000
Cash inflows – III year82000
Cost of capital12%

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in the respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 62
Step 3 – Enter the formula in B6 = NPV (12%, B2:B4)-B1 to get NPV
Output:

Net Present value24287.08

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 28.
Write the Libre Office Calc formula to multiply a given number entered in a cell with the following conditions

  • If the cell value is less than 20, then multiply by 1
  • If the cell value is greater than or equal to 20 but less than 40, then multiply by 2
  • If the cell value is greater than or equal to 40 but less than 80, then multiply by 3
  • If the cell value is greater than or equal to 80 but less than 100, then multiply by 4.
  • If the cell value is greater than or equal to 100, then display “Enter a value less than 100” Use nested IF function.

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank work sheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 63
Step 3 – Enter any value in cell A2; then the result will be in cell B2.
Output:

Cell valueResult
1818
3774
115Enter value less than 100
85340

Question 29.
Salary detail of 8 employees are given below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 64
Develop a formula to compute tax under the following conditions.
1. Tax rate-20%

2. For males, Rs. 2,00,000 is allowed as standard deduction. For females, if taxable income is less than or equal to Rs. 5,00,000, then Rs. 3,00,000 is allowed as standard deduction, otherwise Rs. 2, 50,000. Use suitable logical function.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 65
Step 3 – Enter the formula in cell E2 and copy it to the last employee.
=IF (C2 = “MALE”, (D2-20Q000)*20%, IF (AND(C2 = “FEMALE”, D2<=500000), (D2 – 300000) * 20%, (D2-250000)*20%))
Output:

NameTax
Elsy40,000
Jose90,000
Rosily20,000
Rejina40,000
Antony1,00,000
Jessy30,000
George80,0000
Baby60,000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 30.
The recruitment process of language teachers in a school consists of three items like interview, group discussion and paper presentation. A candidate has to qualify any one of the three tests to qualify for the written test. The prescribed standard for the items are given below.

  • Interview – 16 score out of 20.
  • Group Discussion – 25 score out of 30.
  • Paper Presentation – 40 score out of 50

Other informations are also available.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 66
Write a formula using OR function to check whether a candidate qualify or not.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank work sheet in LiberOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the available data in work sheet
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 67
Step 3 – Enter the formula in F2 and copy it to the last candidate
= IF(OR (C2>=16, D2>=25, E2>=40) “Qualified for the written Test”, “Not Qualified”)
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 68

Question 31.
Business studies, Accountancy and Economics are commerce subjects. Write a formula to check whether text is a commerce subject. If yes, print **** is a commerce subject, otherwise print **** is not a commerce subject. Write procedure based on the available hints
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank work sheet in LiberOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the text in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 69
Step 3 – Enter the name of subject in A2 and type the formula in B2 and drag it
= IF (OR (A2= “Business studies”, A2 = “Accountancy”, A2= “Economics”), A2 & “is a” & “Commerce Subject”, A2 & “is” & “not a commerce subject”)
Output:

SubjectRemarks
MalayalamMalayalam is not a commerce subject
Business studiesBusiness studies is a commerce subject
ChemistryChemistry is not a commerce subject
MathematicsMathematics is not a commerce subject
AccountancyAccountancy is a commerce subject.

Question 32.
ABC company issued a security with par value Rs. 50000 on 1/1/2013. The first interest date is 1-4-2013, the settlement date is 31-12-2015 an the annual coupon rate is 6%. The security’s payments are made quarterly, and a US (NASD) 30/360 day count basis is used. Use ACCRINT() function to calculated the accrued interest of a security that pays periodic interest.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a blank new worksheet in LibreOffice Calc.

Step 2 – Enter the data in the following cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 70
Step 3 – Enter the formula in B9 = ACCRINT (B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B7, B8)
Output:

Accrued Interest9000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 33.
Prince took a loan of Rs. 500000 from banks @ 12% interest p.a. repayable after 15 years. Compute interest payable at the end of (a) First year (b) Second year (c) Fifth year and the last year.
procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the given details in respective cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 71
Step 3 – Enter the given formula in respective cells.

  • B8 = CUMIPMT(B3/12, B2*12, B4, B5, B6, B7)
  • C8 = CUMIPMT(C3/12, C2*12, C4, C5, C6, C7)
  • D8 = CUMIPMT(D3/12, D2*12, D4, D5, D6, D7)
  • E8 = CUMIPMT(E3/12, E2*12, E4, E5, E6, E7)

Output:

YearInterest
First year59316.92
Second year57707.11
Fifth year51545.84
Last year4470.16

Question 34.
Calculate the present value of an annuity that pays Rs. 3000 per month for a period of 5 years. The interest is 11.5% per annum and each payment is made at the end of the month.
Assume the payments are made.

  • At the beginning of each month
  • At the end of each month

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in LibreOffice Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following data/ Formula in respective cells.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 72
Step 3 – Enter the formula as follows
B6 = PV (B2/12, B3*12, B4, B5)
C6 = PV(C2/12, C3*12, C4, C5)
Output:

Present value – at the beginning136409.4
Present value – at the end136410.04

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet

Question 35.
The table given below shows the First name, Middle name and Last name of some employees. Show their Full name in the next column using CONCATENATE Function.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 73
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open a new blank worksheet in Liber Office Calc
Application → Office → Libre Office Calc

Step 2 – Enter the following details in appropriate cells
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Spread Sheet - 75
Step 3 – Enter the following formula in D2 cell = CONCATENATE (A2, “ ”, B2, “ ”, C2)

Step 4 – Copy down the formula up to the row of last employee.
Output:

FULL NAME
Roby Antony Alappatt
Hema Gangadharan Menon
Cili Jose Vazhappilly
Santhosh Jacob Kannanaikal

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Students can Download Chapter 4 Determinants Questions and Answers, Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Plus Two Maths Determinants Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Using properties of determinants prove \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{x} & {y} & {x+y} \\{y} & {x+y} & {x} \\{x+y} & {x} & {y}\end{array}\right|\) = -2(x3 + y3).
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 1
= 2(x + y)(-x2 + xy – y2) = -2(x3 + y3).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 2.
If a, b, c are real numbers and \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{b+c} & {c+a} & {a+b} \\{c+a} & {a+b} & {b+c} \\{a+b} & {b+c} & {c+a}\end{array}\right|\) = 0, Show that a = b = c.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 2
2(a + b + c) [(b – c) (c – b) – (b – a) (c – a)] =0 (a+b+c) = 0
(a + b + c) = 0 or (b – c) (c – b) = (b – a) (c – a)
(a + b + c) = 0 or a = b = c.

Question 3.
Solve using properties of determinants.
\(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{2 x-1} & {x+7} & {x+4} \\{x} & {6} & {2} \\{x-1} & {x+1} & {3}
\end{array}\right|\) = 0
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 3
⇒ (x – 1) (x2 + x – 6x + 6) = 0
⇒ (x – 1)(x2 – 5x + 6) = 0
⇒ (x – 1) (x – 3) (x – 2) = 0
⇒ x = 1, x = 3, x = 2.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 4.
If \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{3} & {x} \\{x} & {x}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{cc}{-2} & {2} \\{4} & {1}\end{array}\right|\), find the value of x.
Answer:
\(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{3} & {x} \\{x} & {x}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{cc}{-2} & {2} \\{4} & {1}\end{array}\right|\)
⇒ 3x – x2 = – 2 – 8
⇒ x2 – 3x – 10 = 0
⇒ x = 5, -2.

Question 5.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-3} & {1} \\{2} & {0} & {4} \\{1} & {2} & {-2}
\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Calculate |A| (1)
  2. Find |adjA| {Hint: using the property A × adjA = |A|I} (1)
  3. Find |3A| (1)

Answer:
1. |A| = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-3} & {1} \\{2} & {0} & {4} \\{1} & {2} & {-2}
\end{array}\right]\) = – 28.

2. A × adjA = |A|I
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 4

3. |3A| = 27 × |A| = 27 × -28 = -756.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 6.
Using properties of determinants prove the following.
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 5
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 6
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 7

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 8
= 2{-{-c){b{a – c)) – b(-c(c + a))}
= 2{c(ab – cb) + b(c2 + ac)}
= 2{abc – c2b + bc2 + abc)} = 4abc.

Plus Two Maths Determinants Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
(i) If \(\left|\begin{array}{rrr}{1} & {-3} & {2} \\{4} & {-1} & {2} \\{3} & {5} & {2}\end{array}\right|\) = 40, then \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {4} & {3} \\{-3} & {-1} & {5} \\{2} & {2} & {2}\end{array}\right|\) = ?
(a)   0
(b)  – 40
(c)  40
(d)  2 (1)
(ii) \(\left|\begin{array}{rrr}{3} & {-3} & {2} \\{12} & {-1} & {2} \\{9} & {5} & {2}\end{array}\right|\) = ?
(a) 120
(b)  40
(c)  – 40
(d)  0 (1)
(iii) Show that ∆ = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{-a^{2}} & {a b} & {a c} \\{b a} & {-b^{2}} & {b c} \\{a c} & {b c} & {-c^{2}}\end{array}\right|\) = 4a2b2c2 (2)
Answer:
(i) (c) 40

(ii) (a)120

(iii) ∆ = abc\(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{-a} & {a} & {a} \\{b} & {-b} & {b} \\{c} & {c} & {-c}\end{array}\right|\) take a, b, c from C1, C2, C3
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 9

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 2.
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 10
Answer:
(i) \(\left|\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {4} \\{5} & {1}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{ll}{2 x} & {4} \\{6} & {x}\end{array}\right|\) ⇒ -18 = 2x2 – 24.
⇒ 2x2 = 6 ⇒ x2 = 3 ⇒ x = \(\pm \sqrt{3}\).

Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 11
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 12

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants
Question 3.
Prove that \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{(b+c)^{2}} & {a^{2}} & {a^{2}} \\{b^{2}} & {(c+a)^{2}} & {b^{2}} \\{c^{2}} & {c^{2}} & {(a+b)^{2}}\end{array}\right|\) = 2abc(a + b + c)3.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 13
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 14
= (a + b + c)2 × 2ab [(b + c) (c + a) – ab]
= (a + b + c)2 × 2ab [bc + ab + c2 + ac – ab)
= (a + b + c)2 × 2abc [a + b + c]
= 2abc (a + b + c)3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 4.
(i) Let the value of a determinant is ∆. Then the value of a determinant obtained by interchanging two rows is
(a) ∆
(b) -∆
(c) 0
(d) 1 (1)
(ii) Show that \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{a+b} & {b+c} & {c+a} \\{b+c} & {c+a} & {a+b} \\{c+a} & {a+b} & {b+c}\end{array}\right|=2\left|\begin{array}{lll}{a} & {b} & {c} \\{b} & {c} & {a} \\{c} & {a} & {b}\end{array}\right|\) (3)
Answer:
(i) (b) -∆

(ii) Operating C1 → C1 + C2 + C3, we have
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 15
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 16

Question 5.
Test the consistency 3x – y – 2z = 2, 2y – z = -1, 3x – 5y = 3.
Answer:
The given system of equations can be put in the matrix form, AX = B, where
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 17
|A| = 3(0 – 5) + 1(0 + 3) – 2(0 – 6) = 0
C11 = -5, C12 = -3, C21 = -6, C22 = 10, C23 = 6, C31 = 12, C32 = 5, C33 = 6
Plus Two Maths Determinants 3 Mark Questions and Answers 18
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 19
Therefore the system is inconsistent and has no solutions.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 6.
Consider the system of equations 2x – 3y = 7 and 3x + 4y = 5

  1. Express the system in AX = B form. (1)
  2. Find adj A (2)
  3. Solve the system of equations. (1)

Answer:
1. |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{2} & {-3} \\{3} & {4}\end{array}\right|\) = 8 + 9 = 17.

2. c11 = 4, c12 = -3, c21 = 3, c22 = 2,
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 20

3. The given equations can be expressed in the form AX = B,
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 21

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 7.
(i) If A and B are matrices of order 3 such that|A| = -1; |B| = 3, then |3AB| is
(a) -9
(b) -27
(c) -81
(d) 9 (1)
(ii) If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1} & {\tan x} \\{-\tan x} & {1}\end{array}\right]\), Show that AT A-1 = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{\cos 2 x} & {-\sin 2 x} \\{\sin 2 x} & {\cos 2 x}\end{array}\right]\) (3)
Answer:
(i) (c) -81 (since |3AB| = 27|A||B|).

(ii) |A| = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1} & {\tan x} \\{-\tan x} & {1}\end{array}\right]\) = sec2x ≠ 0, therefore A is invertible.
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 22

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 8.
Consider the determinant ∆ = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{x} & {x^{2}} & {1+x^{3}} \\{y} & {y^{2}} & {1+y^{3}} \\{z} & {z^{2}} & {1+z^{3}}\end{array}\right|\), Where x, y, z, are different.
(i) Express the above determinant as sum of two determinants. (1)
(ii) Show that if ∆ = 0, then 1 + xyz = 0. (3)
Answer:
(i) Given,
∆ = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{x} & {x^{2}} & {1+x^{3}} \\{y} & {y^{2}} & {1+y^{3}} \\{z} & {z^{2}} & {1+z^{3}}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{x} & {x^{2}} & {1} \\{y} & {y^{2}} & {1} \\{z} & {z^{2}} & {1}\end{array}\right|+\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{x} & {x^{2}} & {x^{3}} \\{y} & {y^{2}} & {y^{3}} \\{z} & {z^{2}} & {z^{3}}\end{array}\right|\)

Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 23
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 24
Given, ∆ = 0 ⇒ (1 + xyz)(y – x)(z – x)(z – y) = 0 ⇒ 1 + xyz = 0
∵ x ≠ y ≠ z.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 9.
(i) The value of the determinant \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{\sin 10} & {-\cos 10} \\{\sin 80} & {\cos 80}\end{array}\right|\) is
(a) – 1
(b) 1
(c) 0
(d) – 2 (1)
(ii) Using properties of determinants, show that (3)
\(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{a} & {a^{2}} & {b+c} \\{b} & {b^{2}} & {c+a} \\{c} & {c^{2}} & {a+b}\end{array}\right| = (b – c) (c – a) (a – b) (a + b + c)\)
Answer:
(i) (b) Since,
sin 10 cos 80 + cos 10 sin 80 = sin (10 + 80) =sin 90 = 1.

(ii) Let C3 → C3 + C1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 25
= (a + b + c)(b – a)(c – a)(c + a – b – a)
= (a + b + c)(b – a)(c – a)(c – b)
= (b – c)(c – a)(a – b)(a + b + c).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 10.
(i) Choose the correct answer from the bracket. Consider a square matrix of order 3. Let C11, C12, C13 are cofactors of the elements a11, a12, a13 respectively, then a11C11 + a12C12 + a13C13 is (1)
(a) 0
(b) |A|
(c) 1
(d) none of these.
(ii) Verify A(adjA) = (adjA)A = |A|I for the matrix A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{5} & {-2} \\{3} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\) that, where I = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{1} & {0} \\{0} & {1}\end{array}\right]\) (3)
Answer:
(i) (b) |A|

(ii) |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{5} & {-2} \\{3} & {-2}\end{array}\right|\) = – 4
C11 = – 2, C12 = – 3, C21 = 2, C22 = 5
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 26
Hence A(adjA) = (adjA)A = |A|I.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 11.
Consider the following system of equations x + 2y = 4,2x + 5y = 9

  1. If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{1} & {2} \\{2} & {5}\end{array}\right]\), find |A| (1)
  2. Express the above system of equations in the form AX = B (1)
  3. Find adj A, A-1 (1)
  4. Solve the system of equations. (1)

Answer:
1. |A| = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{1} & {2} \\{2} & {5}\end{array}\right]\) = 5 – 4 = 1

2. The given system of equation can be expressed in the form AX = B.
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 27

3. Cofactor matrix of A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{5} & {-2} \\{-2} & {1}\end{array}\right]\)
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 28

4. We have,
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 29
x = 2, y = 1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 12.
Consider the point X(-2, -3), B(3, 2), C(-1, -8)

  1. Find the area of ∆ABC (2)
  2. Find third vertex of any other triangle with same area and base AB. (2)

Answer:
1. \(\frac{1}{2}\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{-2} & {-3} & {1} \\{3} & {2} & {1} \\{-1} & {-8} & {1}\end{array}\right|\)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) (- 2(2 + 8) + 3(3 + 1) + 1(- 24 + 2)) = – 15
Area of ∆ ABC = 15.

2. The base AB is fixed and the third point is variable. Therefore we can choose any x coordinate and find y coordinate or vice versa.
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 30
⇒ – 2(2 – y) + 3(3 – 1) + 1(3y – 2) = 30
⇒ – 4 + 2y + 6 + 3y – 2 = 30
⇒ 5y = 30 ⇒ y – 6
Therefore point is(1, 6).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 13.
Find the inverse of the following
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 31
Answer:
(i) Let |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {2} & {3} \\{0} & {2} & {4} \\{0} & {0} & {5}\end{array}\right|\) = 10
C11 = 10, C12 = 0, C13 = 0, C21 = – 10, C22 = 5, C23 = 0, C31 = – 2, C32 = – 4, C33 = 2
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 32

(ii) Let |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {0} & {0} \\{3} & {3} & {0} \\{5} & {2} & {-1}\end{array}\right|\) = -3
C11 = -3, C12 = 3, C13 = -9, C21 = 0, C22 = -1, C23 = -2, C31 = 0, C32 = 0, C33 = 3
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 33

(iii) Let |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {1} & {3} \\{4} & {-1} & {0} \\{-7} & {2} & {1}\end{array}\right|\)
= 2(-1 – 0) -1(4 – 0) + 3(8 – 7) = -3
C11 = -1, C12 = -4, C13 = 1, C21 = 5, C22 = 23, C23 = -11, C31 = 3, C32 = 12, C33 = -6

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 34

(iv) Let |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-1} & {2} \\{0} & {2} & {-3} \\{3} & {-2} & {4}\end{array}\right|\)
= 1(8 – 6) + 1(0 + 9) + 2(0 – 6) = -1
C11 = 2, C12 = -9, C13 = -6, C21 = 0, C22 = -2, C23 = -1, C31 = 3, C32 = 3, C33 = 2
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 35

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 14.
Consider the system of equations 5x + 2y = 4, 7x + 3y = 5. If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{5} & {2} \\{7} & {3}\end{array}\right]\), X = \(\left[\begin{array}{l}{\mathrm{r}} \\{y}\end{array}\right]\) and B = \(\left[\begin{array}{l}{4} \\{5}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find |A| (1)
  2. Find A-1 (2)
  3. Solve the above system of equations. (1)

Answer:
1. |A| = \(\left|\begin{array}{ll}{5} & {2} \\{7} & {3}\end{array}\right|\) = 15 – 14 = 1.

2. Given, A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{5} & {2} \\{7} & {3}\end{array}\right]\)
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 36

3. X = A-1B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 37
⇒ x = 2, y = -3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Plus Two Maths Determinants Six Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
(i) Let A be a square matrix of order ‘n’ then |KA| = …….. (1)
(ii) Find x if \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{x} & {2} \\{18} & {x}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{cc}{6} & {2} \\{18} & {6}\end{array}\right|\) (2)
(iii) Choose the correct answer from the bracket. The value of the determinant \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{0} & {p-q} & {p-r} \\{q-p} & {0} & {q-r} \\{r-p} & {r-q} & {0}
\end{array}\right|\) is ….. (1)
(iv) Consider \(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{a} & {a+b} & {a+b+c} \\{2 a} & {3 a+2 b} & {4 a+3 b+2 c} \\{3 a} & {6 a+3 b} & {10 a+6 b+3 c}\end{array}\right|\) (2)
Answer:
(i) If A be a square matrix of order n, then |KA| = Kn|A|

(ii) \(\left|\begin{array}{cc}{x} & {2} \\{18} & {x}\end{array}\right|=\left|\begin{array}{cc}{6} & {2} \\{18} & {6}\end{array}\right|\) ⇒ x2 – 36 = 0
⇒ x2 = 36 ⇒ x = ±6.

(iii) (c) 0 (since the given determinant is the determinant of a third order skew symmetric matrix)

Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 38
= a [7a2 + 3ab – 6a2 – 3ab] = a(a2) = a3

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 2.
(i) Let \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {3} & {2} \\{2} & {0} & {1} \\{3} & {4} & {3}
\end{array}\right|\) = 3, then what is the value of \(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {3} & {2} \\{4} & {0} & {2} \\{3} & {4} & {3}\end{array}\right|\) = ? and\(\left|\begin{array}{lll}{6} & {7} & {6} \\{2} & {0} & {1} \\{3} & {4} & {3}\end{array}\right| \) = ? (2)
(Hint: Use the properties of determinants)
(ii) Using properties of determinants show that (4)
\(\left|\begin{array}{ccc}{1+a} & {1} & {1} \\{1} & {1+b} & {1} \\{1} & {1} & {1+c}\end{array}\right|=a b c\left(1+\frac{1}{a}+\frac{1}{b}+\frac{1}{c}\right)\)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 39

(ii) Taking ‘a’ from R1, ‘b‘ from R2,’C’ from R3
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 40
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 41

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants
Question 3.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {-3} & {5} \\{3} & {2} & {-4} \\{1} & {1} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find |A| (1)
  2. Find adj.A. (2)
  3. Solve 2x – 3y + 5z = 11, 3x + 2y – 4z = -5, x + y – 2z = -3 (3)

Answer:
1. A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {-3} & {5} \\{3} & {2} & {-4} \\{1} & {1} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\)
|A| = 2 × 0 + 3x – 2 + 5 = -1.

2. Co.factor A
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 42

3. Given
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 43
i.e; AX = B ⇒ X = A-1 B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 44

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 4.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-1} & {1} \\{2} & {1} & {-3} \\{1} & {1} & {1}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Is A singular? (1)
  2. Find adj A. (2)
  3. Obtain A-1 (1)
  4. Using A-1 solve the system of equations x – y + z = 4, 2x + y – 3z = 0, x + y + z = 2 (2)

Answer:
1. A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-1} & {1} \\{2} & {1} & {-3} \\{1} & {1} & {1}\end{array}\right]\)
⇒ |A| = 4 + 5 + 1 = 10 ≠ 0
A is non singular matrix.

2. Cofactor A
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 45

3. A-1 = \(\frac{1}{10}\) \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{4} & {2} & {2} \\{-5} & {0} & {5} \\{1} & {-2} {3}\end{array}\right]\)

4. Given, AX = B ⇒ X = A-1 B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 46
⇒ x = 2, y = -1, z = 1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 5.
Solve the following system of linear equations.

  1. x + y + z = 3, y – z = 0, 2x – y = 1 (6)
  2. 5x – 6y + 4z = 15 , 7x + 4y – 3z = 19, 2x + y + 6z = 46 (6)
  3. x + 2y + 5z = 10, x – y – z = -2, 2x + 3_y-2 = -11 (6)

Answer:
1. Let AX = B
Where A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {1} & {1} \\{0} & {1} & {-1} \\{2} & {-1} & {0}\end{array}\right], X=\left[\begin{array}{c}{x} \\{y} \\{z}\end{array}\right], B=\left[\begin{array}{l}{3} \\{0} \\{1}\end{array}\right]\)
|A| = 1(0 – 1) – 1(0 + 2) + 1(0 – 2) = -5
C11 = -1, C12 = -2, C13 = -2, C21 = -1, C22 = 3, C23 = 3, C31 = -2, C32 = 1, C33 = 1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 47

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

2. Let AX = B,
Where A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{5} & {-6} & {4} \\{7} & {4} & {-3} \\{2} & {1} & {6}\end{array}\right], X=\left[\begin{array}{c}{x} \\{y} \\{z}\end{array}\right],B=\left[\begin{array}{c}{15} \\{19} \\{46}\end{array}\right]\)
|A| = 5(24 + 3) + 6(42 + 6) + 4(7 – 8) = 419
C11 = 27, C12 = -48, C13 = -1, C21 = -1, C22 = 22, C23 = -17, C31 = 2, C32 = 43, C33 = 62
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 48
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 49

3. Let AX = B
\(\text { Where } A=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {2} & {5} \\{1} & {-1} & {-1} \\{2} & {3} & {-1}
\end{array}\right], X=\left[\begin{array}{c}{x} \\{y} \\{z}\end{array}\right], B=\left[\begin{array}{c}{10} \\{-2} \\{-11}\end{array}\right]\)
|A| = 1(4) – 2(1) + 5(5) = 27
C11 = 4, C12 = -1, C13 = 5, C21 = 17, C22 = -11, C23 = 1, C31 = 3, C32 = 6, C33 = -3
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 50
⇒ x = -1, y = -2, z = 3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 6.
If f(x) = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{\cos x} & {-\sin x} & {0} \\{\sin x} & {\cos x} & {0} \\{0} & {0} & {1}\end{array}\right]\)
(i) Find f(-x) (2)
(ii) Find (f(x)]-1 (2)
(iii) Is |f(x)]-1 = f(-x)? (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 51

(ii) |f(x)| = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{\cos x} & {-\sin x} & {0} \\{\sin x} & {\cos x} & {0} \\{0} & {0} & {1}\end{array}\right]\) = cos x (cos x) + sin x (sin x) = 1 ≠ 0
Therefore , [f(x)]-1 exists.
The cofactors are as follows.
C11 = cos x, C12 = -sin x, C13 = 0, C21 = sin x, C22 = cos x, C23 = 0, C31 = 0, C32 = 0, C33 = 1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 52
Since, |f(x)|= 1

(iii) Yes. From (1) and (2) we have,
[f(x)]-1 =f(-x).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 7.
(i) Choose the correct answer from the bracket. If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{2} & {3} \\{1} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\) and A-1 = kA, then the value of ‘k’ is
(a) 7
(b) -7
(c) \(\frac{1}{7}\)
(d)\(-\frac{1}{7}\) (1)
(ii) If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-1} & {1} \\{2} & {-1} & {0} \\{1} & {0} & {0}
\end{array}\right]\),
(a) A2 (2)
(b) Show that A2 = A-1 (3)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 53
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 54
C11 = 0, C12 = 0, C13 = 1, C21 = 0, C22 = -1, C23 = -1, C31 = 1, C32 = 2, C33 = 1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 55

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 8.
‘Arjun’ purchased 3 pens, 2 purses, and 1 instrument box and pays Rs. 410. From the same Shop ‘Deeraj’ purchases 2 pens, 1 purse, and 2 instrument boxes and pays Rs.290, while ‘Sindhu’ purchases 2pens, 2 purses, 2 instrument boxes and pays Rs. 440.

  1. Translate the equation into system of linear equations. (2)
  2. The cost of one pen, one purse and one instrument box using matrix method. (4)

Answer:
1. Let The price of one pen is Rs.x, one purse is Rs.y and one instrument box be Rs.z
3x + 2y + z = 410; 2x + y + 2z =290; 2x + 2y + 2z = 440(1) 2 mts.

2. The system can be represented by the matrix equation AX = B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 56
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 57
C11 = -2, C12 = 0, C13 = 2, C21 = -2, C22 = 4, C23 = -2, C31 = 3, C32 = -4, C33 = -1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 58
Hence the cost one pen is Rs.20, one purse is Rs. 150 and one instrument box is Rs. 50.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 9.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {-3} & {5} \\{3} & {2} & {-4} \\{1} & {1} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find A-1 (3)
  2. Using it solve the system of equations 2x – 3y + 5z = 16, 3x + 2y – 4z = -4, x + y – 2z = -3 (3)

Answer:
1. A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {-3} & {5} \\{3} & {2} & {-4} \\{1} & {1} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\)
⇒ |A| = 0 + 3x – 2 + 5 = -1
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 59

2. Given AX = B
⇒ X = A-1B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 60
⇒ x = 2, y = 1, z = 3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 10.
Consider the following system of equations x + y + 3z = 5, x + 3y – 3z = 1, -2x – 4y – 4z = -10
(i) Convert the given system in the form AX = B (1)
(ii) Find A-1 (3)
(iii) Hence solve the system of equations. (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 61

(ii) i.e; AX = B, ⇒ X = A-1 B ⇒ |A| = -24 + 10 + 6 = -8
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 62

(iii) X = A-1B
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 63
= \(-\frac{1}{8}\) \(\left[\begin{array}{l}{-8} \\{-8} \\{-8}\end{array}\right]\)
⇒ x = 1, y = 1, z = 1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 11.
Solve the following system by equations by matrix method x + 2y + 5z = 10; x – y – z = -2; 2x + 3y – z = -11.
Answer:
x + 2y + 5z = 10; x – y – z = -2; 2x + 3y – z = 11
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 64
⇒ x = -1, y = -2, z = 3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 12.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{3} & {-2} & {3} \\{2} & {1} & {-1} \\{4} & {-3} & {2}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find |A| (1)
  2. Find A-1 (3)
  3. Solve the linear equations 3x – 2y + 3z = 8; 2x + y – z = 1; 4x – 3y + 2z = 4 (2)

Answer:
1. |A| = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{3} & {-2} & {3} \\{2} & {1} & {-1} \\{4} & {-3} & {2}\end{array}\right]\)
= 3(2 – 3) + 2(4 + 4) + 3(- 6 – 4) = -17.

2. |A| ≠ 0, hence its inverse exists.
A-1 = \(\frac{1}{|A|}\)adj A
C11 = -1, C12 = -8, C13 = -10, C21 = -5, C22 = -6, C23 = 1, C31 = -1, C32 = 9, C33 = 7
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 65

3. The given system of linear equations is of the form
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 66
∴ We have, x = 1, y = 2, z = 3.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Determinants

Question 13.
if \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{2} & {5} \\{-3} & {7}\end{array}\right] \times A=\left[\begin{array}{cc}{17} & {-1} \\{47} & {-13}\end{array}\right]\) then
(i) Find the 2 × 2 matrix A. (3)
(ii) Find A2. (1)
(iii) Show that A2 + 5A – 6I = 0, where I is the identity matrix of order 2. (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 67
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 68
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 69
Plus Two Maths Determinants 4 Mark Questions and Answers 70

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Students can Download Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Plus Two Computer Science Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Among the following which one is the most correct. JavaScript is used mostly at the
(a) client side
(b) server side
(c) client side and server side
Answer:
(a) client side

Question 2.
Name the tag that is used to embed scripts in a web page.
Answer:
<SCRIPT>

Question 3.
In JavaScript, a variable is declared using the keyword
Answer:
var

Question 4.
………………. are small programs embedded in the HTML pages.
Answer:
Scripts

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 5.
Who developed JavaScript?
Answer:
Brendan Eich

Question 6.
………… are the scripts that are executed by the browser
Answer:
Client Scripts

Question 7.
……………… are the scripts that are executed by the web server.
Answer:
Server Scripts.

Question 8.
……………… Script is a platform independent script.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 9.
……………. Script is a platform dependent script.
Answer:
VBScript

Question 10.
……………. makes the tags meaningful.
Answer:
Attribute

Question 11.
……………. attribute specifies the name of the scripting language used.
Answer:
Language

Question 12.
State True or False
The identifiers are case sensitive
Answer:
True

Question 13.
Which part of the browser executes the JavaScript.
Answer:
JavaScript engine

Question 14.
Odd one out
(a) Google Chrome
(b) Internet Explorer
(c) Mozilla Firefox
(d) C++
Answer:
(d) C++, It is a programming language others are browsers.

Question 15.
A group of codes with a name is called …………
Answer:
function

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 16.
To declare a function the keyword ……………. is used.
Answer:
function

Question 17.
A function contains a function …………. and function ………
Answer:
header, body

Question 18.
State true or false
Even though a function is defined within the body section, it will not be executed, if it is not called.
Answer:
True

Question 19.
Write down the purpose of the following code snippet
function print()
{
document.writefWelcome to JS”);
}
Answer:
This code snippet is used to display the string, “Welcome to JS” on the screen (monitor)

Question 20.
From the following select which one is Not the data type in JavaScript
(a) Number
(b) String
(c) Boolean
(d) Time
Answer:
(d) Time

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 21.
…………… keyword is used to declare a variable in JavaScript.
Answer:
var

Question 22.
…………. function is used to return the data type.
Answer:
typeof()

Question 23.
……………….. is a special data type to represent variables that are not defined using var.
Answer:
undefined

Question 24.
Odd one out
(a) +
(b) –
(c) %
(d) ==
Answer:
(d) == , It is a relational operator the others are arithmetic operator

Question 25.
Odd one out
(a) &&
(b) ||
(c) !
(d) %
Answer:
(d) %, it is an arithmetic operator, others are logical operator.

Question 26.
Odd one out
(a) <
(b) >
(c) ==
(d) !
Answer:
(d) ! it is a logical operator, the others are relational operator.

Question 27.
Consider the following declaration
varb;
From the following which value can be used for the variable b as boolean value.
(a) True
(b) TRUE
(c) True
(d) FALSE
Answer:
(a) True, The value is case sensitive

Question 28.
Predict the output of the following.
var a, b;
a = ”0480″;
b = 2828159;
document.write(a+b);
Answer:
The output is “04802828159”. That is the string “0480″ concatenates(joins) the number 2828159. The output is a string, not a number.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 29.
Predict the output
var x, y;
x = ”8″;
y = 3;
document. write(x+y);
Answer:
The output is a string “83”; String addition means concatenation.

Question 30.
From the following which method is used to display a message (dialog box) on the screen.
(a) alert()
(b) isNaN()
(c) toUpperCase()
(d) toLowerCase()
Answer:
(a) alert()

Question 31.
Raju wants to convert a lower case text to Upper case text, which function is to be used.
Answer:
toUpperCase()

Question 32.
Christy wants to convert an upper case text to lower case text, which function is to be used.
Answer:
tolower case()

Question 33.
Andrea wants to check a value is a number or not. From the following which function is used for that.
(a) isNumb()
(b) isNaN()
(c) isNotNumb()
(d) isNotNumber()
Answer:
(b) isNaN()

Question 34.
Predict the output of the following code snippet
var x =”HIGHER SECONDARY”;
alert(x.charAt(4));
Answer:
It displays a message box with character ‘E’ from the fifth (4 + 1) place

Question 35.
Read the following three statements regarding JavaScript.
(a) JavaScript can be used at the client side for data validation.
(b) JavaScript statements are case sensitive.
(c) JavaScript can be used only for creating web pages.
(d) All the three statements are correct
Answer:
(d) All the three statements are correct

Question 36.
Write the output of the following web page.
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT languge = “JavaScript”> document.write(“welcome”);
</SCRIPT>
welcome
</BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
welcome welcome

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 37.
Following is the web page that accepts a string from a text box, converts in to upper case and display it on the screen. Complete the missing portion in the page.
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<SCRIPT language = JavaScript”> function show()
{
var x, y;
x = ………….. ;
y = x.toupperCase ();
alert (y);
<SCRIPT>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<FORM name= “form1 ”>
Enter a string
<tNPUTtype=“text”name=“TEXTr>
<INPUT type= “submit” onClick() = “show()”> </FORM>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
document.form1.text1.value

Question 38.
Name the attribute of <SCRIPT> tag that is used to include an external JavaScript file into a web page.
Answer:
src

Plus Two Computer Science Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A javaScript code has the following three variables and values.
x = “Script”;
y = “3”;
z = “2″;
Then match the following table.
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img1
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img2

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 2.
“Placing JavaScript as an external file has some advantages”. Do you agree with this statement? Why?
Answer:
External (another) JavaScript file:
We can write scripts in a file and save it as a separate file with the extension .js. The advantage is that this file can be used across multiple HTML files and can be enhance the speed of page loading.

Question 3.
Explain the difference between the statements.
document.write (“welcome”);
and
alert (“welcome)”;
Answer:
document.write () is a JavaScript command used to print anything on the browser window, document writes (“welcome”) prints “welcome” on the browser window. alert (“welcome”). This is a built in function used to display a message here the message “welcome” in a separate window.

Question 4.
Is it necessary to use Language – ‘JavaScript” in the <SCRIPT> tag to specify the JavaScript code? Why?
Answer:
No, it is not necessary. If the language attribute is not specified, it will take the default value as Javascript.

Question 5.
Write the output of the following web page:
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT language=”JavaScript”> function show ()
{
document.write(“welcome to JavaScript”);
}
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
It will not display anything on the screen. This code snippet contains a function that will not do anything unless it is invoked(called).

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 6.
Write the output of the following web page:
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT language -”JavaScript”>
function show ()
{
document.write (“welcome to JavaScript<br>”);
}
</SCRIPT>
show();
show();
<BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
The output is as follows
welcome to JavaScript
welcome to JavaScript
The message repeats 2 times.

Question 7.
Among the following, identify the data types used in JavaScript
int, float, number, char, boolean, long
Answer:
From the list there is only two, number and boolean are the types used in JavaScript.

Question 8.
Write the output of the following web page and justify your answer.
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT language =’’JavaScript”>
var x, y, z;
x =“10”;
y = “20”;
z = x+y;
document.write(z);
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
x = “10” means x is a string variable y = “20” means y is a string variable x + y means the string x and y will be concatenated Hence it displays 1020

Question 9.
What do you mean by Scripts? Explain?
Answer:
Scripts are small programs embedded in the HTML pages. <SCRIPT> tag is used to write scripts,
The attributes used are:

  • Type – To specify the scripting language
  • Src – Specify the source file

Two types of scripts:
1. Client scripts – These are scripts executed by the browser.
Eg: VB Script, Javascript, etc.

2. Server scripts – These are scripts executed by the server.
Eg: ASP, JSP, PHP, Perl, etc.

The languages that are used to write scripts are known as scripting languages.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 10.
Suppose you have written a JavaScript function named checkData(). You want to execute the function when the mouse pointer is just moved over the button. How will you complete the following to do the same?
<INPUT Type=”button” ______ = “checkData()”>
Answer:
<INPUT Type=”button” onMouseEnter = “checkData()”>

Plus Two Computer Science Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Categorize the following as UpperCamelCase or lowerCamelCase and explain.
(a) DateOfBirth
(b) dateOfJoining
(c) timeOfJoining
(d) PlaceOfBirth
Answer:
CamelCase:
An identifier does not use special characters such as space hence a single word is formed using multiple words. Such a naming method is called CamelCase (without space between words and all the words first character is in upper case letter).

These are two types:
1. UpperCamelCase: when the first character of each word is capitalised,
2. lowerCamelCase: when the first character of each word except the first word is capitalised.

  • UpperCamelCase: DateOfBirth, PlaceOfBirth
  • lowerCamelCase: dateOfJoining, time Of Joining.

Question 2.
Explain the method of working of a JavaScript
Answer:
Every browser has a JavaScript engine. If the code snippet contains JavaScript code, it is passed to the JavaScript engine for processing, the engine executes the code. If there is no script then it processes without the help of script engine. Hence an HTML file without JavaScript is faster than with JavaScript code.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 3.
Write down the various data types used in JavaScript.
Answer:

  1. Number: Any number(whole or fractional) with or without a sign.
    Eg: +1977,-38.0003,-100,3.14157,etc
  2. String: It is a combination of characters enclosed within double-quotes.
    Eg: “BVM”, “[email protected]”, etc
  3. Boolean: We can use either true or false.lt is case sensitive. That means can’t use TRUE OR FALSE

Question 4.
Explain how a variable is declaring in JavaScript
Answer:
For storing values you have to declare a variable, for that the keyword var is used. There is no need to specify the data type.
Syntax:
var<variable name1> [, <variable name2>, <variable name3>,etc…]
Here square bracket indicates optional.
Eg: var x, y, z;
x =11;
y = “BVM”;
z = false;
Here x is of number type, y is of string and z is of Boolean type.

Question 5.
What are the different ways to add Scripts to a web page?
Answer:
The three different ways to add Scripts as follows
1. Inside <BODY> section
Scripts can be placed inside the <BODY> section.

2. Inside <HEAD> section
Scripts can be placed inside the <HEAD> section. This method is widely accepted method

3. External (another) JavaScript file
We can write scripts in a file and save it as a separate file with the extension .js. The advantage is that this file can be used across multiple HTML files and can be enhance the speed of page loading.

Question 6.
Create a web page that checks whether a student has passed or not?
Answer:
<HTML>
<head>
<title>
JavaScript-Passed or not </title>
<SCRIPTLanguage=”JavaScript”> function check()
{
var score;
score=document.frmCheck.txtscore.value; . if(score<30)
alert(“The student is failed”); else ;
alert(“The student is passed”);
}
</SCRIPT>
</head>
<BODY>
<Form name=”frmCheck”>
Enter the score
<inputtype=”text” name=”txtscore”>
<br>
<input type=”button” value=”check” onClick= “check()”>
</Form>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 7.
Create a web page to display the squares of first 10 numbers
Answer:
<HTML>
<head>
<title>
JavaScript- squares
</title>
</head>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”> vari.s;
for(i=1; i<=10; i++)
{
s= i * i;
document.write(s);
document.write(“<br>”);
}
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Question 8.
Create a web page to display even numbers up to 10.
Answer:
<HTML>
<head>
<title>
JavaScript- squares </title>
</head>
<BODY>
<SCRI PT Language=”JavaScript”>
vari;
i=2;
while(i<=10)
{
document.write(i); document.write(“<br>”); i +=2;
}
</SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 9.
Following web page is used to show “Passed” or “Failed” based on a mark. Mark’less than 30 is cosidered as failed. There are some errors in the code. Correct them.
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT src=”JavaScript”>
var m;
m = 55;
if(m<30)
document.print(“Passed”);
document.print(“Failed”);
<SCRIPT>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Answer:
<HTML>
<BODY>
<SCRIPT language=”JavaScript”>
var m;
m = 55;
if(m<30)
document.write(“Passed”);
else
document.write(“Failed”);
</BODY>
</HTML>
</SCRIPT>

Plus Two Computer Science Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider the following declarations
vara, b, c, d;
a = “BVM”;
b = 100;
c = true;
d = 3.14157;
Predict the output of the following

  1. document.write(typeof(a)); (1)
  2. document.write(typeof(b)); (1)
  3. document.write(typeof(c)); (1)
  4. document.write(typeof(d)); (1)
  5. document.write(typeof(e)); (1)

Answer:

  1. string
  2. number
  3. boolean
  4. number
  5. undefined

Question 2.
Create a web page to print the day of a week
Answer:
<HTML>
<head>
<title>
JavaScript- day </title>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaSCTipt”>
function checkData()
{
var n, ans;
n=Number(document.frmCheck.txtday. value); switch (n)
{
case 1;
ans=”Sunday”; break; case 2:
ans=”Monday”; break; case 3:
ans=”Tuesday”; break; case 4:
ans=”Wednesday”;
break;
case 5:
ans=”Thursday”;
break;
case 6:
ans=”Friday”;
break;
case 7:
ans=”Saturday”;
break;
default:
ans=”lnvalid”
}
alert(ans);
}
</SCRIPT>
</head>
<BODY>
<Form name=”frmCheck”>
Enteranumber(1-7)
<inputtype=”text” name=”txtday”>
<br>
<input type=”button” va|ue=”Test” onClick= “checkData()”>
</Form>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 3.
What is the operator? Explain in detail.
Answer:
Operators are the symbols used to perform an operation
1. Arithmetic operators:
It is a binary operator. It is used to perform addition(+), subtraction(-), division (/), multiplication (*), modulus(%-gives the remainder), increment(++) and decrement(- -) operations.
Eg. If x = 10andy = 3then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img3
lf x = 10 then
document.write(++x); → It prints 10 + 1 = 11 If x = 10 then
document.write(x++); → It prints 10 itself. If x = 10 then
document.write(—x); It prints 10 – 1 = 9 If x = 10 then
document.write(x—); → It prints 10 itself.

2. Assignment operators:
If a = 10 and b = 3 then a = b. This statement sets the value of a and b are same,i.e. it sets a to 3.
It is also called short hands lf X = 10 and Y = 3 then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img4

3. Relational(Comparision) operators:
It is used to perform comparison or relational operation between two values and returns either true or false.
Eg: if X =10 and Y = 3 then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img5

4. Logical operators:
Here AND(&&), OR(||) are binary operators and NOT (!) is a unary operator. It is used to combine relational operations and it gives either true or false If X = true and Y = false then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img6

Both operands must be true to get a true value in the case of AND(&&) operation. If X = true and Y = false then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img7

Either one of the operands must be true to get true value in the case of OR(||) operation If X = true and Y = false then
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img8

5. String addition operator(+):
This is also called concatenation operator. joins(concatenates)two strings and forms a string.
Eg:
var x, y, z;
x = “BVM HSS;
y = “Kalparamba”;
z = x + y;
Here the variable z becomes “BVM HSS Kalparamba”.
Note: If both the operands are numbers then addition operator(+) produces number as a result otherwise it produces string as a result. Consider the following
Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript img9

Question 4.
Write down the control structures used in JavaScript.
Answer:
Control structures in JavaScript, In general, the execution of the program is sequential, we can change the normal execution by using the control structures.
1. simple if Syntax:
if(test expression)
{
statements;
}
First, the test expression is evaluated, if it is true then the statement block will be executed otherwise not.
if-else Syntax:
if(test expression)
{
statement block1;
}
else
{
statement block2;
}
First, the test expression is evaluated, if it is true then the statement block1 will be executed otherwise statement block2 will be evaluated.
2. switch:
It is a multiple branch statement. Its syntax is given below, switch (expression)
{
case value1: statements;break;
case value2: statements;break;
case value3: statements;break;
case value4: statements;break;
case value5: statements;break;
default: statements;
}
First expression evaluated and selects the statements with matched case value.
Eg.
switch (n)
{
case 1: cout << “Sunday”;break;
case 2: cout << “Monday”;break;
case 3: cout << “Tuesday”;break;
case 4: cout << “Wednesday”;break;
case 5: cout << “Thursday”;break;
case 6: cout << “Friday”;break;
case 7: cout << “Saturday”;break;
default: cout << “lnvalid”
}
3. for loop
If a statement wants to execute more than once. Loop is used. for loop is an entry controlled loop.
The syntax of for loop is given below For(initialisation; testing; updation)
{
Body of the for loop;
}
while loop
If a statement wants to execute more than once Loop is used. It is also an entry controlled loop The syntax is given below
Loop variable initialised while(expression)
{
Body of the loop;
Update loop variable;
}
Here the loop variable must be initialised outside the while loop. Then the expression is evaluated if it is true then only the body of the loop will be executed and the loop variable must be updated inside the body. The body of the loop will be executed until the expression becomes false.

Plus Two Computer Science Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Client-Side Scripting Using JavaScript

Question 5.
Write down the different mouse events used in JavaScript.
Answer:
Different mouse events and their description is given below

EventDescription
onClickIt occurs when the user clicks on an object by using mouse
on mouse enterIt occurs when the mouse pointer is moved onto an object
on mouse leaveIt occurs when the mouse pointer is moved out of an object
onKeyDownIt occurs when the user presses a key on the keyboard
on KeyUpIt occurs when the user releases a key on the keyboard

Question 6.
Create a web page that displays the capital of a state.
Answer:
<HTML>
<HEAD>
<TITLE>
JavaScript </TITLE>
<SCRIPT Language=”JavaScript”> function capital()
{
varn.ans;
n=document.frmCapital.cbostate.selectedlndex; switch(n)
{
case 0:
ans=’Thiruvananthapuram”; i break;
case 1:
ans=”Bengaluru”;
break;
case 2:
ans=”Chennai”;
break;
case 3:
ans=”Mumbai”;
break;
}
document.frmCapital.txtCapital.value=ans;
}
</SCRIPT>
</HEAD>
<BODY>
<FORM name=”frmCapital”>
<center>
State
<select size=1 name=”cbostate”>
<option>Kerala</option>
<option>Kamataka</option>
<option>Tamilnadu</option>
<option>Maharashtra</option>
</select>
<br>
Capital
<input type=”text” name=”txtCapital>
<br>
<input type=”button” value=”Show” onClick= “capital()”>
</center>
</FORM>
</BODY>
</HTML>

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Students can Download Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Plus Two Accountancy Overview of Computerised Accounting System One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Accounting Packages are developed on the basis of
(a) Accounting concepts
(b) Accounting conventions
(c) Both Accounting concepts and Conventions
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Both Accounting concepts and Conventions

Question 2.
What type of Software is an Accounting Package?
(a) System Software
(b) Application Software
(c) Utility Software
(d) Basic
Answer:
(b) Application Software

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 3.
The components of computerised accounting system are
(a) Data, Report, Ledger, software, Hardware
(b) Software, Hardware, People, Procedure, Data
(c) Data, Coding, Procedure, Objective, Output
(d) People, Procedure, Hard ware, software
Answer:
(b) Software, Hardware, People, Procedure, Data

Question 4.
Grouping of Accounts means the classification of data from:
(a) Assets, Capital, and Liabilities
(b) Assets, Capital, Liabilities, Revenues & Expenses
(c) Assets, Owners equity, Revenue & Expenses
(d) Capital, Liabilities, Revenues, & Expenses
Answer:
(b) Assets, Capital, Liabilities, Revenues & Expenses

Question 5.
Codification of Accounts required for the purpose of:
(a) Hierarchical relationship between groups and components
(b) Data processing faster and preparing of final accounts
(c) Keeping data and information secured
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(a) Hierarchical relationship between groups and components

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 6.
Method of codification should be
(a) Such that it leads to grouping of accounts
(b) An identification mark
(c) Easy to understand and leads to grouping of accounts
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Easy to understand and leads to grouping of accounts

Question 7.
Final account subsystem in Accounting Information System (AIS) deals with
(a) Preparation of budgets
(b) Preparation of Pay Roll
(c) Preparation of Final Accounts
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Preparation of Final Accounts

Question 8.
Pick the odd one out
(a) Password security
(b) Data Audit
(c) Data Bank
(d) Data vault
Answer:
(c) Data Bank

Question 9.
Which among the following is an example of mnemonic codes.
(a) AS03, AS04, AS05
(b) 1925, 1926, 1927, 1928
(c) ACC, ECO, ENG, MAL
(d) 001-100, 101-200, 201-300, 301-400
Answer:
(c) ACC, ECO, ENG, MAL

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 10.
Which among the following deals with generation of reports that are vital for management decision making?
(a) Costing sub system
(b) Pay Roll Accounting Sub system
(c) Budget Sub System
(d) Management Information System
Answer:
(d) Management Information System

Question 11.
The need of codification is
(a) Easy to process data
(b) Keeping proper records
(c) The generation of block codes
(d) The encryption of data
Answer:
(d) The encryption of data

Question 12.
Choose the correct pair
(a) Cash and Bank sub system – Deals with receipts and payments of cash
(b) Inventory subsystem – deals with recording of sales
(c) Payroll Accounting sub system – deals with the preparation of final accounts
(d) Accounts receivable sub system – deals with expenses.
Answer:
(a) Cash and Bank sub system – Deals with receipts and payments of cash

Plus Two Accountancy Overview of Computerised Accounting System Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the Five pillers of computerised Accounting System.
Answer:
Procedure, Data, people, Hardware and software

Question 2.
What is computerised accounting?
Answer:
Computerised accounting is the process of recording business transactions and generating financial statements and reports with the help of computer.

Question 3.
List down any Five popular accounting softwares available in India.
Answer:
GNUKhata, Tally, Dac Easy, Tata Ex, Peach Tree

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 4.
Define Data
Answer:
Data is raw, unorganised facts that need to be processed. Data can be something simple and useless until it is organised.
When data is processed, organised, structured or presented in a given context so as to make it useful, it is called information. A computer is an information processing machine. Computers process data to produce information

Question 5.
Write down any two features of computerised accounting system
Answer:
Features of computerised accounting system:
1. Simple and Integrated:
Computerised accounting system is designed to integrate all the business operations such as sales, finance, purchase, etc.

2. Accuracy and speed:
Computrised Accounting system provides data entry forms for fast and accurate data entry of the transactions.

3. Scalability:
The system can cope easily with the increase in the volume of business transactions. The software can be used for any size and type of the organisation.

Question 6.
What are the account groups of Trading Account under Computerised Accounting System?
Answer:

  • Sales account
  • Purchase account
  • Direct Expenses Account
  • Direct Incomes Account

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 7.
Complete the Table
Name of Account –  Account group in financial Account
Sundry Debtors –  Balance sheet, Asset side

  1. Indirect Income __________________________
  2. Current Liabilities ________________________
  3. Stock in hand ____________________________
  4. Sales Account ___________________________

Answer:

  1. Profit & Loss Account, Credit side
  2. Balances Sheet, Liability side
  3. Balance Sheet, Asset side
  4. Trading Account, Credit side

Question 8.
What do you mean by sequential code? Give example.
Answer:
Sequential codes:
Here numbers or alphabets are assigned in consecutive order. These codes are applied primarily to source documents such as cheques, invoices, etc.
Example:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Three marks q4 img 1

Question 9.
What are the basic accounting reports prepared by Computerised Accounting System?
Answer:

  • Day Book/ Journals
  • Ledges
  • Trial balance
  • Profit and Loss Account
  • Balance Sheet

Plus Two Accountancy Overview of Computerised Accounting System Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A computerised accounting software is developed for a company. In Ledger Group, Expenses are divided in to direct expenses and indirect expenses. All the possible expenses of the company are listed under these two sub headings. Appropriate identification numbers are assigned to each such items.

  1. Identify the concepts referred to this context
  2. Give explanations to each.

Answer:

  1. Grouping of Accounts and codification of Accounts
  2. Grouping of accounts means classifying the ledger accounts and organizing them under major heads of accounts
    The process of assigning codes to account groups and ledger groups is called codification of accounts.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 2.
What are the advantages of computerised Accounting System?
Answer:

  • Financial reports can be prepared in time
  • Alterations and additions in transactions are easy and gives the changed result in all books of accounts instantly
  • It ensures effective control over the system
  • Economy in the processing of accounting data
  • Confidentiality of data is maintained
  • The closing balance of one financial year is automatically carried forward to next financial year

Question 3.
Create an accounting hierarchy for the following ledger account:

  • Cash-in-hand
  • Provisions for Tax
  • Land and Buildings
  • Bank Account (Current)
  • Trade Investments
  • Investments in Govt. Securities
  • Deposits with Bank
  • Duties and Taxes
  • Sundry Debtors

Answer:

  • Fixed assets: Land & Building Investment in Govt. Securities
  • Current assets: Cash in hand Trade Investments
  • Bank: Bank a/c (Current), Deposits with bank
  • Sundry debtors: Sundry debtors
  • Loans & advances: Provision for Tax
  • Duties and Taxes: Duties of Taxes

Question 4.
What are the different types of codes commonly used in CAS?
Answer:
Sequential codes:
Here numbers or alphabets are assigned in consecutive order. These codes are applied primarily to source documents such as cheques, invoices, etc.
Example:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Three marks q4 img 1

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

2. Block Codes:
In Block codes, a range of numbers is alloted to a particular account group. Here, numbers within a range follow sequential coding scheme.
Room Numbering System of a Lodge

 CodeAccount group (group of Legers)
100 – 199Rooms in First Floor
200 – 299Rooms in Second Floor
300 – 399Rooms in third Floor

Coding of Dresses

CodeAccount group (group of Legers)
HS400 – HS 499Half Sleeve Shirts
FS500 – FS 599Full Sleeve Shirts
MI 600 – MI 699Mens Inner Wares

3. Mnemonic codes:
A mnemonic code consists of alphabets or abbreviations as symbols to codify an account.
1.

CodeName of Accounts
1) SLRSalary Account
2) BODBank Overdraft
3) INVInventory

2.

CodeName of Places
1) TSRThrissur
2) TVMThiruvananthapuram
3) DLHDelhi

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 5.
Distinguish between Data Audit and Data Vault
Answer:
Security Features of Computerised Accounting Software
1. Data Audit:
It enables one to know as to who and what changes have been made in the original data there by helping and fixing the responsibility of the person who has manipulated the data and ensures data integrity.

2. Data Vault:
Software provides additional security through data encryption. Encryption means scrambling the data so as to make its interpretation impossible.

Question 6.
What is the activity sequence of computerised Accounting information processing model?
Answer:

  • Collect data
  • Organise data
  • Communicate Accounting Information

Question 7.
Akhil, your class mate, argues that computerised Accounting System suffers some draw

  1. Do you agree with this?
  2. Give your justification

Answer:

  1. I agree
  2. Limitations of CAS.
    • Faster Obsolescence of technology necessitates frequently upgradation in accounting software.
    • Data may be lost or corrupted due to power interruption.
    • Un programmed reports can not be generated
    • Alterations in transactions are easy. This reduces the reliability of accounting work.
    • Work with CAS is expensive.

 

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 8.
What are the different components of computerised Accounting System?
Answer:
Components of computerised Accounting System:

  • Procedure: A logical sequence of actions to perform a task.
  • Data: The raw fact for any business operation.
  • People: Users of computerised accounting system
  • Hardware: The physical components of a computer.
  • Software: A set of programmes to do a work.

Plus Two Accountancy Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In the computerised accounting package used by a trading concern, the fixed assets and current assets are combined to form the assets group. The fixed assets are sub divided into tangible and intangible assets.
Show the hierarchy of this ledger group, assuming various assets items.
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q1 img 2

Question 2.
Illustrate with example methodology to develop coding structure.
Answer:
Methodology to Develop Coding Structure:
Let us examine the 15 digit Goods and Services Tax Identification Number (GSTIN). GSTIN is a 15 digit unique code that is assigned to each taxpayer, which will be state-wise and PAN-based.

GSTIN Format or Structure (GSTIN):
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q2 img 4
From the above details, we can identify that GSTIN is a combination of state code, PAN, number of registration within the state, default digit and check code to detect errors.

Another Example:
Let us examine how to develop a coding structure for students in Thrissur district under DHSE. The first step is to develop a hierarchy of the school system and attributes
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q2 img 5
Thus we allocate 13 digit code to a student.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q2 img 6

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 3.
What do you mean by AIS? What are the different subsystems of AIS?
Answer:
Accounting Information System (AIS):
Accounting Information System (AIS) and its various subsystems may be implemented through the Computerised Accounting System (CAS). Such system of AIS are described below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q3 img 7
1. Cash and Bank subsystem:
Receipts and payments of cash

2. Sales and Accounts Receivable sub system:
Maintaining of sales and Receivables ledgers.

3. Inventory sub system:
Purchase and sale of goods, Specifying the price, quantity, and date.

4. Purchase and Accounts Payable Sub system:
Maintaining of purchase and payable leadgers.

5. Pav Roll Accounting sub System:
Payment of salaries and wages.

6. Fixed Assets Accounting Sub system:
Purcahses, additions, sale and usage of fixed assets.

7. Expense Accounting sub system:
Various types of expenses.

8. Tax Accounting Sub system:
Deals with GSTIN, Income Tax etc.

9. Final Accounts sub system:
Preparation of final accounts.

10. Costing sub system:
Ascertainment of cost of goods produced.

11. Budget sub system:
Preparation of budgets.

12. Management information sub system (MIS):
Preparation of reports that are vital for management decision making.

Question 4.
What is DATA Encryption? What are the security features of CAS?
Answer:
Security Features of Computerised Accounting Software:
Every accounting software ensures data security, safety, and confidentiality by providing the features like Password Security, Data Audit and Data Vault.

1. Password Security:
Password is the key to allow the access to the system. Computerised accounting system protects the unauthorised persons from accessing to the business data. Only authorised person, who is supplied with the password, can enter to the system.

2. Data Audit:
It enables one to know as to who and what changes have been made in the original data there by helping and fixing the responsibility of the person who has manipulated the data and ensures data integrity.

3. Data Vault:
Software provides additional security through data encryption. Encryption means scrambling the data so as to make its interpretation impossible.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System

Question 5.
Draw a chart showing different sub systems of Accounting information system.
Answer:
Accounting Information System (AIS):
Accounting Information System (AIS) and its various sub-systems may be implemented through Compterised Accounting System (CAS). Such system of AIS are described below.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 Overview of Computerised Accounting System Four marks q3 img 7
1. Cash and Bank subsystem:
Receipts and payments of cash

2. Sales and Accounts Receivable sub system:
Maintaining of sales and Receivables ledgers.

3. Inventory sub system:
Purchase and sale of goods, Specifying the price, quantity, and date.

4. Purchase and Accounts Payable Sub system:
Maintaing of purchase and payable leadgers.

5. Pav Roll Accounting sub System:
Payment of salaries and wages.

6. Fixed Assets Accounting Sub system:
Purcahses, additions, sale and usage of fixed assets.

7. Expense Accounting sub system:
Various types of expenses.

8. Tax Accounting Sub system:
Deals with GSTIN, Income Tax, etc.

9. Final Accounts sub system:
Preparation of final accounts.

10. Costing sub system:
Ascertainment of cost of goods produced.

11. Budget sub system:
Preparation of budgets.

12. Management information sub system (MIS):
Preparation of reports that are vital for management decision making.

Question 6.
Differentiate between Data and Information.
Answer:

DataInformation
1. It is used as input1. It is the output of processed data
2. Data is the raw material2. Information is the product
3. It doesn’t carry a meaning3. It must carry a logical meaning
4. It is an independent value4. Information depends on data

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Students can Download Chapter 1 The Solid State Questions and Answers, Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Plus Two Chemistry The Solid State One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The 14 possible three dimensional crystal lattices are called ____________.
Answer:
Bravais Lattices

Question 2.
Which of the following type of cubic lattices has maximum number of atoms per unit cell?
(a) simple cubic
(b) body centred cubic
(c) face centred cubic
(d) all have same
Answer:
(c) face centred cubic (4 atoms per unit cell)

Question 3.
F- centres in an ionic crystal are
(a) lattice sites containing electrones
(b) interstitial sites containing electrons
(c) lattice cites that are vacant
(d) interstitial sites containing electrones
Answer:
(a) lattice sites containing electrons

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 4.
The colour imparted by excess potassium in KCl crystal is ________.
Answer:
Violet (or lilac)

Question 5.
Which of the following substances show anti-ferromagnetism?
(a) ZrO2
(b) CdO
(c) CrO2
(d) Mn2O3
Answer:
(d) Mn2O3

Question 6.
The number of tetrahedral and octahedral voids in a ccp array of 100 atoms are respectively.
Answer:
200 and 100

Question 7.
Potassium dichromate belongs to which crystal system.
Answer:
Triclinic

Question 8.
A solid compound contains XYZ atoms in a cubic lattice with X atoms occupying the corners, Y atoms in the body centred positions and Z atoms at the centres of faces of the unit cell. What is the empirical formula of the compound Answer:
XYZ3

Question 9.
The empty space in body centred cubic lattice is
Answer:
32%

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 10.
Which solid has the weakest intermolecular force
Answer:
ice

Question 11.
In crystalline solid, atoms, ions or molecules are held in an orderly array. But some point defect is observed in a crystal, when a vacancy is created by an atom or ion dislocated from its normal position to an interstitial site. What is the defect called?
Answer:
Frenkel defect

Plus Two Chemistry The Solid State Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State two marks q1 Img 1

  1. Write the names of A and B?
  2. Identify and write the name of the shaded parts of A and B?

Answer:
1. Names of A and B are:

  • Hexagonal close packing.
  • Square close packing,

2. shaded parts of A and B are:

  • Is octahedral void; in
  • Is tetrahedral void.

Question 2.
Teacher said that Frenkel defect will not happen in alkali metal halides. Ramu asked the reason for this. Can you explain?
Answer:
Frenkel defect is favoured by the small size of cations. In alkali metal halides both cations and anions are of almost same size.

Question 3.
“Dielectric substances are related to conductors.”
“Dielectric substances do not conduct electricity at normal condition”
These are two arguments of a class discussion.

  1. Do you agree with these arguments?
  2. If yes, justify both statements?

Answer:

  1. Yes.
  2. Dielectric substances do not conduct electricity through them. But they can be made conductors either by heating the substances or by applying mechanical stress.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 4.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State two marks q3 Img 2

  1. Identify A and B.
  2. Explain them.

Answer:
1. A and B.

  • A – Square close packed (scp) arrangement in two dimensions.
  • B- Hexagonal close packed (hep) arrangement in two dimensions.

2. Explanation:

(a) A – Square close packed:
(scp) arrangement in two dimensions – particles of the second row are arranged just below the first row. Similarly, particles of third row are arranged just below the particles of the second row and so on. Here vertical as well as horizontal alignment is possible. In this arrangement each particle is in direct contact with four other particles and the coordination number is 4.

(b) B- Hexagonal close packed:
(hep) arrangement in two dimensions – In this arrangement, particles of second row are arranged in the depressions of the particles of the first row. Similarly the particles of the third row are arranged in the depressions of the particles of the second row. In this arrangement, each particle is in direct contact with six other particles and the coordination number is 6.

Question 5.

  1. Name the unit of magnetic moment.
  2. Match the following.
    • Paramagnetic – Fe3O4
    • Ferromagnetic – O2
    • Antiferromagnetic – CrO2
    • Ferrimagnetic – MnO

Answer:

  1. Bohr magneton (μB)
  2. Match
    • Paramagnetic – O2
    • Ferromagnetic – CrO2
    • Antiferromagnetic – MnO
    • Ferrimagnetic – Fe3O4

Question 6.
All crystals exhibit imperfections.

  1. Which law is related to this statement?
  2. Draw the picture showing Frenkel defect.

Answer:
1. Third law of thermodynamics.

2.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State two marks q6 Img 3

Question 7.
What do you mean by Anisotropy how is it differ from isotropy
Answer:

AnisotropicIsotropic
Physical properties have different values along different directionsPhysical property would be same in any direction
Because they have different arrangement in different directionsBecause arrangement is irregular in any direction

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 8.
A cubic solid is made of two elements P and Q. Atoms of Q are at the corners of the cube and P at the body-centre. What is the formula of the compound? What are the coordination numbers of P and Q?
Answer:
The atom at the corner makes \(\frac{1}{8}\) contribution while atom at body centre makes 1 contribution to the unit cell.
No. of atoms of Q per unit cell = 8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 1
No. of atoms of P per unit cell = 1 × 1 = 1 Therefore, formula of the compound is PQ.
The atom at the body centre would be in contact with all the atoms at the corners. Hence, the coordination number of P is 8.
Similarly, coordination number of Q is 8 because it is shared by 8 other atoms.

Question 9.
Packing efficiency differ for B.C.C, F.C.C and Simple cube what is packing efficiency?
Answer:
Packing efficiency is the % of total space filled by the particle.

OR

Packing efficiency = \(\frac{\text { Volume occupied by spheres in the unit cell }}{\text { Total volume of the unit cell }} \times 100[/latex ]

Question 10.
If NaCl is doped with 10-3 mol % of SrCl2, what is the concentration of cation vacancies?
Answer:
Every Sr2+ ion causes one cation vacancy (because two Na+ ions are replaced by one Sr2+ and it occupies the site of one Na+ ion and the other site remains vacant.) Therefore, introduction of 10-3 moles of SrCl2 per 100 moles of NaCl would introduce 10-3 moles cation vacancies in 100 moles of NaCl.
No. of vacancies per mole of NaCl = [latex]\frac{10^{-3}}{100}\) × 6.02 × 1023 = 6.02 × 1018

Question 11.
Even crystal, the substance which we consider as the most perfect solid, shows some defects or imperfections.

  1. Which law in thermodynamics deals with this topic?
  2. Explain the law.

Answer:

  1. Third law of thermodynamics
  2. Entropy of a perfectly crystalline substance is zero at absolute zero temperature.

Question 12.
Excess of Li makes LiCl crystal pink and excess of K makes KCl crystals lilac. Is this true? How will you account for the above processes?
Answer:
Yes. This is an example for metal excess defect due to anion vacancies. The colour is due to the presence of F – centre in the crystals.

Question 13.
What are the consequences of Schottky and Frenkel defects?
Answer:
Frenkel defect does not change the density of the crystal but Schottky defect decreases the density of the substance.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 14.
Calculate the number of atoms per unit cell of silver which crystallizes in fee lattice.
Answer:

  • Contribution of particles from one corner = 1/8
  • Contribution from 8 corners = 1/8 × 8 = 1
  • Contribution from 6 face centres = 1/2 × 6 = 3
  • Total number of particles present in the unit cell of the crystal = 1 + 3 = 4
  • Number of atoms present in one unit cell of Ag = 4.

Question 15.
Explain the type of voids found in three-dimensional close packing in crystals.
Answer:
Two voids
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State two marks q15 Img 4

Plus Two Chemistry The Solid State Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In an answer paper a student wrote as “carborundum crystals are very soft.”

  1. Do you agree with this?
  2. What is your opinion?
  3. In which crystal type carborundum is included?
  4. Substantiate your view.

Answer:

  1. No.
  2. Carborundum crystals are very hard.
  3. Covalent crystal.
  4. In the case of covalent crystals the constituent particles are atoms and they are held together by strong covalent bond network. In carborundum covalent bond network is constituted by Si and C atom which are held very strongly at their positions. Hence, carborundum is a covalent crystal and is very hard.

Question 2.
During a seminar a student asked another student, “Can NaCl give flame test?”

  1. Write your answer.
  2. Write the colour of sodium during flame test.
  3. Write the name of the point which is responsible for the colour of alkali metal halides having excess metal ions.

Answer:

  1. Yes
  2. Golden yellow
  3. F-centre electron trapped anion vaccancy

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 3.
Solids are classified into two types.

  1. What are they?
  2. Give two examples.
  3. Give 3 features of them.

Answer:
1. Crystalline and amorphous.

2. Crystalline – NaCl, KCl. Amorphous-Plastic, rubber.

3.

Crystalline SolidsAmorphous Solids
1. Sharp melting point1. Melting point is in a range of temperature
2. Long range order2. Short range order
3. Anisotropic3. Isotropic
4. Definite shape4. Irregular shape

Question 4.
Teacher explained that due to a stoichiometric defect, the density of a crystal changes.

  1. Name the defect.
  2. What change can we observe?
  3. Give an example.

Answer:

  1. Schottky defect
  2. Density decrease
  3. NaCl

Question 5.
1. Packing efficiency is the percentage of total space filled by the particles. Which of the following lattices has the highest packing efficiency? Simple cubic lattice, body centered cubic lattice, hexagonal close packed lattice.

2. An element has a body centred cubic structure with a cell edge of 288 pm. The density of the element is 7.2 g/cm3. How many atoms are present in 208 g of the element?
Answer:
1. Hexagonal close packed lattice.

2. a = 288 pm = 288 × 10-10 cm
Volume of the unit cell = (288 × 10-10cm)3
= 23.9 × 10-24cm3
Volume of 208 g of the element
\(\frac{208 \mathrm{g}}{7.2 \mathrm{g} \mathrm{cm}^{-3}}\) = 28.88 cm3
∴ Number of units cells in 208 g =
\(\frac{28.88 \mathrm{cm}^{3}}{23.9 \times 10^{-24} \mathrm{cm}^{3}}\) = 1.208 × 1024
For bcc structure, number of atoms in one unit cell = 2
∴ Number of atoms in 208 g = 2 × 1.208 × 1024
= 2.416 × 1024

Question 6.
Derive packing efficiency of

  1. ccp and hep structure
  2. Body centered cubic
  3. Simple cubic

Answer:
1. Packing Efficiency in ccp and hep Structures:
In the case of ccp and hep, the edge length
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q6 Img 5
We know that each unit cell in ccp structure has 4 spheres.
Volume of sphere = \(\frac{4 \pi r^{3}}{3}\)
Volume of the cube = a3
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q6 Img 6

2. Packing Efficiency of Body Centred Cubic Structures:
In this case radius of a sphere.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q6 Img 7
We know that bcc has 2 spheres in the unit cell.
∴ Packing efficiency = \(\frac{2 \times \frac{4}{3} \pi r^{3}}{\left[\left(\frac{4}{\sqrt{3}} r\right)\right]^{3}}\) × 100% = 68%

3. Packing Efficiency is Simple Cubic Lattice:
In simple cubic lattice edge length ‘a’ and radius of the sphere ‘r’ are related as,
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q6 Img
We know that a simple cubic unit cell contains only one sphere.
∴ Packing efficiency = \(\frac{1 \times \frac{4}{3} \pi r^{3}}{(2 r)^{3}}\) × 100%
= 52.36%
= 52.4%

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 7.
Iron (II) oxide crystallise in cubic structure with unit cell edge of 5.0 Å If the density of the oxide is 3.8 g cm-3. Calculate the no.of Fe2+ and O2- present in each unit cell, [atomic mass of Fe = 56, O = 16] (3)
Answer:
Cell edge a = 5.0Å = 5.0 × 10-1 m = 5 × 10-8 cm
Density = 3.8 g/cm3 Molecular mass of FeO = 56 + 16 = 72 u
NA = 6.022 × 1023
d = \(\frac{Z M}{N_{A} a^{3}}\)
Z = \(\frac{d N_{A} a^{3}}{M}=\frac{3.8 \times 6.022 \times 10^{23}}{72} \times\left(5 \times 10^{-8}\right)^{3}\)
= 3.97 = 4
Each cell contain 4 FeO molecule every FeO molecule contain one Fe2+ and one O2- ion. So no. of Fe2+ ion =4 no.of O2- ion = 4

Question 8.
Which are the two types of close packing in two dimension. What are its differences?
Answer:
1. Square close packing or AAA type.

  • Coordination no.4. One sphere is in touch with 4 other spheres
  • 2nd raw placed exactly under the first raw

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q8 Img 8

2. Hexagonal close packing or AB AB Type.

  • Coordination no.6 ie. one spheres is in touch with other six spheres.
  • 2nd raw is placed in the depressions of first raw.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q8 Img 9

Question 9.
Classify the following solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, network (covalent) or amorphous.

  • Tetraphosphorus decoxide (P4O10)
  • Ammonium phosphate (NH4PO4)
  • SiC
  • I2
  • P4
  • Plastic
  • Graphite
  • Brass
  • Rb
  • LiBr
  • Si

Answer:

  • Tetraphosphorus decoxide (P4O10) – Molecularsolid
  • Ammonium phosphate (NH4PO4) – Ionic solid
  • SiC – Network(covalent) solid
  • I2 – Molecular solid
  • P4 – Molecular solid
  • Plastic-Amorphous solid
  • Graphite – Network(covalent) solid
  • Brass – Metallic solid
  • Rb- Metallic solid
  • LiBr – Ionic solid
  • Si – Network(covalent) solid

Question 10.
A substance A’ crystallizes in fee lattice.

  1. Calculate the number of atoms present per unit cell of ‘A’.
  2. In a crystalline solid AB, some vacancy is produced by missing of equal number of oppositely charged ions. What is the defect called?

Answer:

  1. The number of atoms present per unit cell of ‘A’.
    • Contribution from 8 corners = 1/8 × 8 = 1
    • Contribution from centres of 6 faces = 1/2 × 6 = 3
    • Total number of atoms of A’ per unit cell = 1 +3 = 4
  2. Schottky defect

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 11.

  1. What is meant by the term coordination number?
  2. What is the coordination number of atoms:
    • In a cubic close-packed lattice?
    • In a body-centred cubic structure?

Answer:

  1. The number of nearest neighbours in a packing is called coordination number.
  2. The coordination number of atoms
    • In cubic-close packed structure each atom is in direct contact with 12 other atoms. Hence, its coordination number is 12.
    • In a body centred cubic structure coordination number is 8

Question 12.
Identify the crystal.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State three marks q12 Img 10

  1. Write the name of the crystal.
  2. How many particles are present the unit cell of this crystal?
  3. Write the relation connecting edge length and radius of the particle.

Answer:

  1. Face centred cubic crystal.
  2. Particles are present the unit cell of this crystal.
    • Contribution from 8 corners = 1/8 × 8 = 1
    • Contribution from 6 face centers = 1/2 × 6 = 3
    • The total number of particles = 4
  3. r = \(\frac{\sqrt{2} a}{4}=\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{2}}\).

Question 13.
1. The following diagram shows the alignment of magnetic moments for some magnetic properties.

  • ↑↑↑↑↑↑
  • ↑↓↑↓↑↓
  • ↑↑↓↑↑↓

Identify the magnetic properties denoted by (a), (b), (c).

2. Examine the substances H2O, NaCl, C6H6 and name the magnetic property common to them.
Answer:
1. The alignment of magnetic moments for some magnetic properties.

  • Ferromagnetic
  • Antiferromagnetic
  • Ferrimagnetic

2. Diamagnetism

Question 14.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of the following lattices?

  1. Face centred cubic
  2. Body centred cubic
  3. Simple cubic

Answer:

  1. Face centred cubic – 4
  2. Body centred cubic – 2
  3. Simple cubic – 1

Plus Two Chemistry The Solid State Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.

  • Classify the following into crystalline and amorphous solids.
    1. NaCl
    2. Graphite
    3. Plastic
    4. Diamond
    5. Rubber
    6. KCl
    7. Wood
    8. CaCO3
    9. Iodine
  • Write any two properties of graphite.

Answer:

Crystalline solidsAmorphous solids
NaCl, GraphitePlastic
Diamond, CsClRubber
CaCO3, IodineWood
  • Two properties of graphite
    1. It is a good conductor of electricity.
    2. Graphite is a good solid lubricant.

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q2 Img 11
Answer:
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q2 Img 12

Question 3.

  1. NaCl shows mainly Schottky defect and AgCl shows Frenkel defect. Do you agree with this statement? Justify.
  2. Classify the following solids into isotropic and anisotropic.
    Polyvinylchloride, Rubber, Glucose, Glass

Answer:

  1. Yes. In NaCl, both Na+ and Cl are of almost same size and hence it shows Schottky defect. But in AgCl, Ag+ is smaller than Cf. Hence, it shows Frenkel defect.
  2. Anisotropic-Glucose
    Isotropic – Glass, Rubber, Polyvinylchloride

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 4.
The common salt, sodium chloride is an example for a crystal system with edge length a = b = c and axial angles α = β = γ = 90°.

  1. Identify the crystal system.
  2. What happens when sodium chloride crystal is heated in presence of sodium?

Answer:

  1. Cubic crystal
  2. Gives yellow colour to the crystal due to F centre, ie. electron trapped anion vaccancy. It is a metal excess defect.

Question 5.
Stoichiometric defects are of two types such as vacancy defects and interstitial defects.

  1. Which defect is basically a vacancy defect in ionic solids?
  2. Which stoichiometric defect causes the decrease in density of solid?
  3. On heating white ZnO it turns yellow. Which is the crystal involved here? Explain.

Answer:

  1. Schottky defect
  2. Schottky defect
  3. It is due to metal excess defect caused by the presence of extra cations at interstitial sites. ZnO is white in colour at room temperature. On heating it loses oxygen and turns yellow.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q5 Img 13
The excess Zn2+ ions move to interstitial sites and the electrons to neighbouring interstitial sites. The yellow colour of non-stoichiometric ZnO (Zn1+xO) is due to these trapped electrons.

Question 6.

  1. Why is Frenkel defect not found in alkali metal halides?
  2. A crystalline solid has simple cubic structure in which P atoms are present at the corners, Q atoms are present at the edge centres and R atoms are present at the centre of the unit cell. What is the formula of the compound?

Answer:
1. Frenkel defect is favoured by the small size of cations. In alkali metal halides both cations and anions are of almost same size.

2. Number of atoms of P = \(\frac{1}{8}\) × 8 = 1
Number of atoms of Q = \(\frac{1}{4}\) × 12 = 3 4
Number of atoms of R = 1
∴ Formula of the compound is PQ3R

Question 7.

  1. Classify each of the following solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, network or amorphous.
    • I2
    • Plastic
    • LiBr
    • SiC
  2. In terms of band theory differentiate Conductors, insulators & semi conductors

Answer:

  1. Classification of solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, network or amorphous.
    • I2 – Molecular
    • Plastic – Amorphous
    • LiBr – Ionic
    • SiC – Covalent
  2. Differences between Conductors, insulators & semi conductors.
    • Conductors:
      The valence band overlaps with the conduction band or no energy gap exists between them.
    • Insulators:
      The energy gap between valance band and conduction band is very large. Hence electrons from valence band cannot move into the conduction band. Semi conductors have small energy gap between valence band and conduction band.

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q7 Img 14

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 8.
On the basis of nature of constituent particles crystals are classified into four types.

  1. Which are they?
  2. In which type does diamond belongs to? Why?
  3. Can you say whether Iodine can be written as an example of ionic crystal? Why?

Answer:

  1. Ionic crystals, Molecular crystals, Covalent crystals and Metallic crystals.
  2. Diamond belongs to covalent crystals, because in diamond, the constituent particles are carbon atoms connected by strong covalent bonds.
  3. No. In ionic crystal the constituent particles are ions. Since the constituent particles of iodine are molecules, it is a molecular crystal.

Question 9.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q9 Img 15

  1. Distinguish between A and B?
  2. Explain the defect in figure B.
  3. Give two examples of crystals showing this defect.

Answer:

  1. Fig. A – Ideal crystal. Fig. B – Frenkel defect.
  2. Frenkel defect is due to the migration of cation from its original position to the void. This type of defect is favoured by the small size of cation. As a result of this defect, the neutrality, density and stoichiometry remain the same. But the conductivity increases.
  3. AgCl, AgBr

Question 10.
The teacher explained crystal defects in classroom.

  1. What are the different types of crystal defects?
  2. Explain with the help of diagram the important difference between Schottky and Frenkel defects?

Answer:
1. Stoichiometric defects and Non-Stoichiometric defects.

2.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q10 Img 16

Question 11.
NaCl is an example for diamagnetic substance.

  1. Write an example for paramagnetic substance.
  2. What is the difference between ferromagnetic and anti ferromagnetic substances?
  3. In case of ferri magnetic substances net magnetic moment is not zero. Justify.

Answer:
1. CuO
2. & 3.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q11 Img 17

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 12.
The diagram of a cubic crystal whose molecular mass = M, edge length = a, density = ρ,  is given below. N is the Avogadro number.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State four marks q12 Img 18

  1. From the above given details find the mass of this cube and also the mass of N particles?
  2. By equating these two equations, try to find out a suitable equation for the density of this cube.

Answer:
1. Mass of cube = volume × density = a3 ρ ……………. (1)
Mass of N particles = N × Mass of one particle
= N × \(\frac{M}{N_{A}}\) (M = Gram Atomic Mass) …………. (2)

2. The equations (1) & (2) represent the mass of the cube.
i.e., a3p = N × \(\frac{M}{N_{A}}\)
∴ \(\rho=\frac{N \times M}{a^{3} \times N_{A}}\)

Question 13.

  1. Classify each of the following as being either a p- type or a n-type semiconductor.
    • Ge dopped with In
    • Si dopped with B
  2. A compound is formed by two elements P and Q. The element Q forms ccp and atoms of P occupy 1/3rd of the tetrahedral voids. What is the formula of the compound?

Answer:
1. Either a p- type or a n-type semiconductor

  • Ge dopped with In → p-type
  • Si dopped with B → p-type

2. The formula of the compound
Q = 4
No. of tetrahedral voids = 2N = 2 × 4 = 8
P = 1/3 × 8 = 8/3
Q8/3P4 = Q8P12 = Q2P3

Plus Two Chemistry The Solid State NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Classify the following solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, network (covalent) or amorphous.

  • Tetraphosphorus decoxide (P4O10)
  • Ammonium phosphate (NH4PO4)
  • SiC
  • I2
  • P4
  • Plastic
  • Graphite
  • Brass
  • Rb
  • LiBr
  • Si

Answer:

  • Tetraphosphorus decoxide (P4O10) – Molecularsolid
  • Ammonium phosphate (NH4PO4) – Ionic solid
  • SiC – Network(covalent) solid
  • I2 – Molecular solid
  • P4 – Molecular solid
  • Plastic-Amorphous solid
  • Graphite – Network(covalent) solid
  • Brass – Metallic solid
  • Rb- Metallic solid
  • LiBr – Ionic solid
  • Si – Network(covalent) solid

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 2.

  1. What is meant by the term coordination number?
  2. What is the coordination number of atoms:
    • In a cubic close-packed lattice?
    • In a body-centred cubic structure?

Answer:

  1. The number of nearest neighbours in a packing is called coordination number.
  2. The coordination number of atoms
    • In cubic-close packed structure each atom is in direct contact with 12 other atoms. Hence, its coordination number is 12.
    • In a body centred cubic structure coordination number is 8

Question 3.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of each of the following lattice?

  1. Face-centred cubic
  2. End-centred monoclinic
  3. Body-centred

Answer:
1. A face-centred cubic unit cell has lattice points at the corners of the cube and at face centres. There are eight comers and six faces of the cube. Each atom at corner makes a contribution of \(\frac{1}{8}\) while each atom at face centre makes a contribution of \(\frac{1}{2}\) to the unit cell.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State ncert q3 Img 19
Therefore, the number of atoms per unit cell
= 8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 6 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1 + 3 = 4

2. A end-centred monoclinic unit cell has lattice points at the face centres of only one set (two) of faces, in addition to the lattice points at the comers of the unit cell.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State ncert q3 Img 20
Therefore, the number of atoms per unit cell =
8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 2 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1 + 1 = 2

3. A body centred cubic unit cell has lattice points at the comers of the cube and at the body centre.
Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State ncert q3 Img 21
Therefore, the number of atoms per unit cell
= 8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) + 1 × 1 = 1 + 1 = 2

Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 1 The Solid State

Question 4.
A cubic solid is made of two elements P and Q. Atoms of Q are at the corners of the cube and P at the body-centre. What is the formula of the compound? What are the coordination numbers of P and Q?
Answer:
The atom at the corner makes \(\frac{1}{8}\) contribution while atom at body centre makes 1 contribution to the unit cell.
No. of atoms of Q per unit cell = 8 × \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 1
No. of atoms of P per unit cell = 1 × 1 = 1 Therefore, formula of the compound is PQ.
The atom at the body centre would be in contact with all the atoms at the corners. Hence, the coordination number of P is 8.
Similarly, the coordination number of Q is 8 because it is shared by 8 other atoms.

Question 5.
If NaCl is doped with 10-3 mol % of SrCl2, what is the concentration of cation vacancies?
Answer:
Every Sr2+ ion causes one cation vacancy (because two Na+ ions are replaced by one Sr2+ and it occupies the site of one Na+ ion and the other site remains vacant.) Therefore, introduction of 10-3 moles of SrCl2 per 100 moles of NaCl would introduce 10-3 moles cation vacancies in 100 moles of NaCl.
No. of vacancies per mole of NaCl = \(\frac{10^{-3}}{100}\) × 6.02 × 1023 = 6.02 × 1018

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Students can Download Chapter 3 Matrices Questions and Answers, Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Plus Two Maths Matrices Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Find the value of a, b and c from the following equations;
\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{a-b} & {2 a+c} \\{2 a-b} & {3 c+d}
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{cc}{-1} & {5} \\{0} & {13}\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
Given;
\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{a-b} & {2 a+c} \\{2 a-b} & {3 c+d}
\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{cc}{-1} & {5} \\{0} & {13}\end{array}\right]\)
⇒ a – b = -1, 2a + c = 5, 2a – b = 0, 3c + d = 13
⇒ a – b = -1
2a – b = 0
– a = -1
⇒ a = 1
We have, a – b = -1 ⇒ 1 – b = -1 ⇒ b = 2
⇒ 2a + c = 5 ⇒ 2 + c = 5 ⇒ c = 3
⇒ 3c + d = 13 ⇒ 9 + d = 13 ⇒ d = 4.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 2.
Simplify cosx\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{\cos x} & {\sin x} \\{-\sin x} & {\cos x}\end{array}\right]\) + sinx\(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{\sin x} & {-\cos x} \\{\cos x} & {\sin x}\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 1

Question 3.
Solve the equation for x, y z and t; if
\(2\left[\begin{array}{ll}{x} & {z} \\{y} & {t}\end{array}\right]+3\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1} & {-1} \\{0} & {2}\end{array}\right]=3\left[\begin{array}{ll}{3} & {5} \\{4} & {6}\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 2
⇒ 2x + 3 = 9 ⇒ x = 3
⇒ 2z – 3 = 15 ⇒ z = 9
⇒ 2y = 12 ⇒ y = 6
⇒ 2t + 6 = 18 ⇒ t = 6.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 4.
Find A2 – 5A + 6I If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {0} & {1} \\{2} & {1} & {3} \\{1} & {-1} & {0}\end{array}\right]\)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 3
A2 – 5A + 6I
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 4

Question 5.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{3} & {-2} \\{4} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\) find k so that A2 = kA – 2I.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 5
Given A2 = kA – 2I
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 6
1 = 3k – 2 ⇒ k = 1.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 6.
Express A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{-1} & {2} & {3} \\{5} & {7} & {9} \\{-2} & {1} & {1}
\end{array}\right]\) as the sum of a symmetric and skew symmetric matrix.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 7
P = 1/2 (A + AT) is symmetric.
Q = 1/2 (A – AT) is skew symmetric.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 8

Question 7.
Find the inverse of the following using elementary transformations.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 9
Answer:
(i) Let A = I A
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 10

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

(ii) Let A = IA
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 11

(iii) Let A = IA
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 12

(iv) Let A = IA
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 13

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 8.
Find the inverse of the matrix A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{2} & {3} \\{-1} & {5}\end{array}\right]\) using row transformation.
Answer:
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{2} & {3} \\{-1} & {5}\end{array}\right]\)
Let A = IA
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 14

Question 9.
\(A=\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {3} \\{4} & {5} \\{2} & {1}\end{array}\right] B=\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-2} & {3} \\{-4} & {2} & {5}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find AB
  2. If C is the matrix obtained from A by the transformation R1 → 2R1, find CB

Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 15

(ii) Since C is the matrix obtained from A by the transformation R1 → 2R1
⇒ C = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{4} & {6} \\{4} & {5} \\{2} & {1}\end{array}\right]\)
Then CB can be obtained by multiplying first row of AB by 2.
CB = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{-20} & {-4} & {42} \\{-16} & {2} & {37} \\{-2} & {-2} & {11}
\end{array}\right]\).

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 10.
Construct a 3 × 4 matrix whose elements are given by

  1. ay = \(\frac{|-3 i+j|}{2}\) (2)
  2. aij = 2i – j (2)

Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 16
a13 = 0, a14 = \(\frac{1}{2}\), a21 = \(\frac{5}{2}\), a22 = 2, a23 = \(\frac{3}{2}\), a24 = 1, a31 = 4, a32 = \(\frac{7}{2}\), a33 = 3, a34 = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 17
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 18
a11 = 1, a12 = 0, a13= -1, a14 = -2, a21 = 3, a22 = 2, a23 = 1, a24 = 0, a31 = 5, a32 = 4, a33 = 3, a34 = 2
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 19

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 11.
Express the following matrices as the sum of a Symmetric and a Skew Symmetric matrix.
(i) \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{6} & {-2} & {2} \\{-2} & {3} & {-1} \\{2} & {-1} & {3}
\end{array}\right]\)
(ii) \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{3} & {3} & {-1} \\{-2} & {-2} & {1} \\{-4} & {-5} & {2}
\end{array}\right]\)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 20
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 21
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 22
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 23

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 12.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {4} & {3} \\{1} & {0} & {6} \\{0} & {-2} & {-3}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find 3A. (1)
  2. Find AT (1)
  3. Evaluate A + AT , is it symmetric? Justify your answer. (1)

Answer:
1. 3A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{6} & {12} & {9} \\{3} & {0} & {18} \\{0} & {-6} & {-9}
\end{array}\right]\)

2. AT = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{2} & {1} & {0} \\{4} & {0} & {-2} \\{3} & {6} & {-3}
\end{array}\right]\)

3. A + AT
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 24
The elements on both sides of the main diagonal are same. Therefore A + AT is a symmetric matrix.

Plus Two Maths Matrices Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Consider the following statement: P(n) : An = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1+2 n} & {-4 n} \\{n} & {1-2 n}\end{array}\right]\) for all n ∈ N

  1. Write P (1). (1)
  2. If P(k) is true, then show that P( k + 1) is also true. (3)

Answer:
1. P(1) : A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1+2} & {-4} \\{1} & {1-2}\end{array}\right]=\left[\begin{array}{cc}{3} & {-4} \\{1} & {-1}\end{array}\right]\)

2. Assume that P(n) is true n = k
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 25
Hence P(k+1) is true n ∈ N.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 2.
Find the matrices A and B if 2A + 3B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {2} & {-1} \\{0{1} & {2} & {4}\end{array}\right]\) and A + 2B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{2} & {0} & {1} \\{1} & {1} & {2} \\{3} & {1} & {2}\end{array}\right]\).
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 26
Solving (1) and (2) ⇒ 2 × (2)
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 27
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 28
Question 3.

  1. Construct a 3 × 3 matrix A = [aij] where aij – 2(i – j) (3)
  2. Show that the matrix A is skew-symmetric. (1)

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 29

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 30
Therefore A is skew-symmetric matrix.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 4.
Consider the following statement P(n ): An = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{\cos n \theta} & {\sin n \theta} \\{-\sin n \theta} & {\cos n \theta}\end{array}\right]\) for all n ∈ N

  1. Write P(1). (1)
  2. If P (k) is true then show that P (k+1) is true (3)

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 31

2. Assume that P(n) is true for n = k
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 32
P(k+1) = Ak+1
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 33
∴ P(k+1) is true. Hence true for all n ∈ N.

Question 5.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {2} & {2} \\{2} & {1} & {2} \\{2} & {2} & {1}\end{array}\right]\), then

  1. Find 4A and A2 (2)
  2. Show that A2 -4A = 5I3 (2)

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 34

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 35

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 6.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{2} & {1} & {3} \\{4} & {1} & {0}\end{array}\right]\) and B= \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1} & {-1} \\{0} & {2} \\{5} & {0}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find AT and BT (1)
  2. Find AB (1)
  3. Show that (AB)T = BT AT (2)

Answer:
1.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 36

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 37

3.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 38
∴ (AB)T = BT AT.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 7.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-3} & {1} \\{2} & {0} & {4} \\{1} & {2} & {-2}\end{array}\right]\) Express A as the sum of a symmetric and skew symmetric matrix.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 39
\(\frac{1}{2}\) (A + AT) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) (A – AT)
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 40

Question 8.

  1. Consider a 2 × 2 matrix A = [aij], where aij = \(\frac{(i+j)^{2}}{2}\)
  2. Write the transpose of A. (2)
  3. Show that A is symmetric. (2)

Answer:
1. A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {\frac{9}{2}} \\{\frac{9}{2}} & {8}\end{array}\right]\)

2. AT = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {\frac{9}{2}} \\{\frac{9}{2}} & {8}\end{array}\right]\)

3. AT = A therefore symmetric matrix.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 9.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{6} & {5} \\{7} & {6}\end{array}\right]\) is a matrix

  1. What is the order of A. (1)
  2. Find A2 and 12 A. (2)
  3. If f(x) = xT – 12x +1; find f(A). (1)

Answer:
1. Order of A is 2 × 2.

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 41

3. f(x) = x2 – 12x + 1 ⇒ f(A) = A2 – 12A + I
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 42

Plus Two Maths Matrices Six Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {4} \\{3} & {2}\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{1} & {3} \\{-2} & {5}\end{array}\right]\), C = \(\left[\begin{array}{rr}{-2} & {5} \\{3} & {4}\end{array}\right]\)
Find each of the following
(i) A + B; A – B
(ii) 3A – C
(iii) AB
(iv) BA
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 43
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 44
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 45
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 46

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 2.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{1} & {2} \\{3} & {4}\end{array}\right]\); B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {1} \\{4} & {5}\end{array}\right]\); C = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {-1} \\{0} & {2}\end{array}\right]\)
(i) Find A + B and A – B (2)
(ii) Show that (A + B) + C = A + (B + C) (2)
(iii) Find AB and BA
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 47
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 48
∴ (A + B) + C = A + (B + C)
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 49

Question 3.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{-1} & {0} & {2} \\{4} & {0} & {-3}\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{0} & {2} \\{-1} & {3} \\{0} & {4}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. What is the order of matrix AB ? (1)
  2. Find AT, BT (2)
  3. Verify (AB)T = BT AT (3)

Answer:
1. Order of AB is 2 × 2. Since order of A is 2 × 3 and B is 3 × 2.

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 50

3.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 51
(AB)T = BT AT.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 4.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{rrr}{1} & {2} & {-3} \\{2} & {1} & {-1}\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {3} \\{5} & {4} \\{1} & {6}\end{array}\right]\)
(i) FindAB. (1)
(ii) Find AT, BT & (AB)T (3)
(iii) Verify that (AB)T = BT AT (2)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 52
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 53
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 54

Question 5.
If A = \(\left[\begin{array}{c}{-2} \\{4} \\{5}\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {3} & {6}\end{array}\right]\)
(i) Find AT, BT (1)
(ii) Find (AB)T (2)
(iii) Verify (AB)T = BT AT (3)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 55
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 56
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 57

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 6.
Let A = \(\left[\begin{array}{cc}{3} & {1} \\{-1} & {2}\end{array}\right]\)
(i) Find A2 (1)
(ii) Show that A2 – 5A + 7I = 0 (1)
(iii) Using this result find A-1 (2)
(iv) Slove the following equation using matrix: 3x + y = 1, – x + 2y = 2.
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 3 Mark Questions and Answers 58
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 59

(iii) A2 – 5A + 7I = 0 ⇒ A2 – 5A = -7I,
multiplying by A-1 on both sides,
⇒ A – 5I = -7 A-1
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 60

(iv) The equation can be represented in matrix form as follows, AX = B ⇒ X = A-1B
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 61

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 7.
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {2} & {3} \\{3} & {-2} & {1} \\{4} & {2} & {1}
\end{array}\right]\)
(i) Show that A3 – 23A – 40I = 0 (3)
(ii) Hence find A-1 (3)
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 62
A3 – 23A – 40I = 0
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 63

(ii) A-1A3 – 23 A-1A – 40A-1I = 0
⇒ A2 – 23I – 40A-1 = 0
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 64

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 8.
A is a third order square matrix and \(a_{i j}=\left\{\begin{aligned}-i+2 j & \text { if } i=j \\i \times j & \text { if } i \neq j\end{aligned} \text { and } B=\left[\begin{array}{lll}{2} & {1} & {1} \\{1} & {1} & {5} \\{1} & {5} & {2}\end{array}\right]\right.\)

  1. Construct the matrix A. (1)
  2. Interpret the matrix A. (1)
  3. Find AB – BA. (3)
  4. Interpret the matrix AB – BA. (1)

Answer:
1. a11 = 1, a12 = 2, a13 = 3, a21 = 2, a22 = 2, a23 = 6, a31 = 3, a32 = 6, a33 = 3
A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {2} & {3} \\{2} & {2} & {6} \\{3} & {6} & {3}\end{array}\right]\)

2. Now,
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 65
Therefore A is symmetric matrix.

3.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 66
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 67

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 68

4.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 69
= -(AB – BA)
∴ skew symmetric matrix.

Question 9.
Find x and y if
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 70
Answer:
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 71
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 72

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 73
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 74

Question 10.
Given that A + B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{2} & {5} \\{7} & {8}\end{array}\right]\) and A – B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ll}{6} & {8} \\{4} & {3}\end{array}\right]\)

  1. Find 2A. (1)
  2. Find A2 – B2. (3)
  3. Is it equal to (A + B) (A – B)? Give reason (2)

Answer:
1. 2A = A + B + A – B
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 75

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

2.
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 76

3. (A + B)(A – B)
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 77
(A + B)(A – B) = A2 + AB – BA – B2
≠ A2 – B2
∵ AB ≠ BA.

Plus Two Maths Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Matrices

Question 11.
(i) Consider A = \(\left[\begin{array}{lll}{1} & {x} & {1}\end{array}\right]\), B = \(\left[\begin{array}{ccc}{1} & {3} & {2} \\{2} & {5} & {1} \\{15} & {3} & {2}
\end{array}\right]\), C = \(\left[\begin{array}{l}{1} \\{2} \\{x}\end{array}\right]\) (2)

A – MatrixB – Order
A3 × 1
B1 × 1
BC2 × 2
ABC3 × 3
1 × 3

(ii) Find x if ABC = 0 (4)
Answer:
(i)

A – MatrixB – Order
A1 × 3
B3 × 3
BC3 × 1
ABC1 × 1

(ii) Given, ABC = 0
Plus Two Maths Matrices 6 Mark Questions and Answers 78
⇒ x2 + 16x + 28 = 0
⇒ (x + 14)(x + 2) = 0
⇒ x = -14, -2.